BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets(06)(PDF)-En

BTS3900A

Installation Guide for EnhancingExisting Cabinets

Issue 06

Date 2014-04-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 06 (2014-04-30) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

OverviewThe BTS3900A (with breathable film), (Ver.A), (Ver.B), and (Ver.C) cabinets can be enhancedto the same capacity as the BTS3900A (Ver.D). After being enhanced, the BTS3900A (withbreathable film) cabinets is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1), the BTS3900A (Ver.A) is named(Ver.D_A2), the BTS3900A (Ver.B) is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_B), and BTS3900A (Ver.C)is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).

This document describes the process for installing the cabinet, boards, modules, and cables inthe enhancement of BTS3900A. It also provides checklist for hardware installation.

Product VersionThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BTS3900A WCDMA V200R013C00 and later versions

BTS3900A LTE V100R003C00 and later versions

BTS3900A GSM V100R013C00 and later versions

BTS3900A V100R004C00 and later versions

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Base station installation personnel

Organization1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets About This Document


ii

This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing ExistingCabinets.

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.C)to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.B)to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2)

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A(Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).

5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A (withbreathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personalinjury.

Calls attention to important information, best practices andtips.NOTE is used to address information not related to personalinjury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

General Conventions



iii

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.



iv

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.



v

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.............1

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)...................................................42.1 Installation Preparations.................................................................................................................................................62.1.1 Pre-upgrade Check......................................................................................................................................................62.1.2 Upgrade Preparations..................................................................................................................................................62.1.3 Documents...................................................................................................................................................................62.1.4 Tools and Instruments.................................................................................................................................................72.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel............................................................................................................82.2 Application Scenarios.....................................................................................................................................................82.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs Only.........................................................................82.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs and RRUs..............................................................202.3 Unpacking Check.........................................................................................................................................................292.4 Restructuring Process...................................................................................................................................................302.5 Powering Off the Base Station.....................................................................................................................................322.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet.............................................................................................................................352.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.......................................................................352.6.2 Replacing the Front Door..........................................................................................................................................462.6.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly.....................................................................................................................................512.6.4 Replacing the ELU....................................................................................................................................................542.6.5 Replacing the Power System.....................................................................................................................................572.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee........................................................................................................642.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.................................................................................................................................662.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.............................................................................................................................722.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.........................................................722.7.2 Replacing the Front Door..........................................................................................................................................832.7.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly.....................................................................................................................................882.7.4 Replacing the ELU....................................................................................................................................................902.7.5 Replacing the DCDU.................................................................................................................................................932.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.................................................................................................................................972.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................1002.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................100

BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets Contents


vi

2.8.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................1062.8.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................1082.8.4 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................1112.8.5 Replacing the RFU..................................................................................................................................................1152.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box..............................................................................................................1182.8.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................1202.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet..................................................................................................1252.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet...............................1252.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................1302.9.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................1352.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................1382.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables...................................................................................................1422.10.1 Installing the BBU Case........................................................................................................................................1422.10.2 Installing the BBU Components............................................................................................................................1472.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B....................................................................................................................1502.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................1542.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.C)...............................................................................1542.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................1672.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................1922.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................1992.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................2042.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................2252.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................2342.11.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................2392.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable......................................................................................................................2412.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable...............................................................................................2432.12 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................2452.13 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................2492.14 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................2602.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................2602.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets......................................................................................................................................2602.14.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................263

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)................................................2663.1 Installation Preparations.............................................................................................................................................2683.1.1 Pre-upgrade Check..................................................................................................................................................2683.1.2 Upgrade Preparations..............................................................................................................................................2683.1.3 Documents...............................................................................................................................................................2683.1.4 Tools and Instruments.............................................................................................................................................2693.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel........................................................................................................2703.2 Application Scenarios.................................................................................................................................................2703.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs Only.....................................................................270



vii

3.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs and RRUs............................................................2823.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................2913.4 Restructuring Process.................................................................................................................................................2923.5 Powering Off the Base Station...................................................................................................................................2943.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................2973.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.....................................................................2973.6.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................3083.6.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................3133.6.4 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................3163.6.5 Replacing the Power System...................................................................................................................................3193.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee......................................................................................................3263.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................3283.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................3343.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.......................................................3343.7.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................3453.7.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................3503.7.4 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................3523.7.5 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................3553.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................3593.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................3623.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................3623.8.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................3683.8.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................3703.8.4 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................3733.8.5 Replacing the RFU..................................................................................................................................................3773.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box..............................................................................................................3803.8.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................3823.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet..................................................................................................3873.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet...............................3873.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................3923.9.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................3973.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................4003.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables...................................................................................................4043.10.1 Installing the BBU Case........................................................................................................................................4043.10.2 Installing the BBU Components............................................................................................................................4093.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B....................................................................................................................4123.10.4 Installing the Air Baffle.........................................................................................................................................4163.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................4173.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.B)...............................................................................4173.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................4313.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................456



viii

3.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................4633.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................4683.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................4893.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................4983.11.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................5033.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable......................................................................................................................5053.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable...............................................................................................5073.12 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................5093.13 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................5133.14 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................5243.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................5243.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets......................................................................................................................................5243.14.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................527

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).............................................5304.1 Introduction to Upgrade..............................................................................................................................................5324.1.1 Restrcutured Cabinets Interior.................................................................................................................................5324.1.2 Restructuring Process..............................................................................................................................................5404.2 Installation Preparations.............................................................................................................................................5424.2.1 Pre-upgrade Check..................................................................................................................................................5424.2.2 Upgrade Preparations..............................................................................................................................................5434.2.3 Document Preparations............................................................................................................................................5434.2.4 Tools and Instruments.............................................................................................................................................5434.2.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel........................................................................................................5444.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................5454.4 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................5464.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.....................................................................5464.4.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................5514.4.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................5544.4.4 Installing an ELU.....................................................................................................................................................5564.4.5 Replacing the Power System...................................................................................................................................5574.4.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee......................................................................................................5634.4.7 (Optional) Installing the Filler Module...................................................................................................................5644.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................5644.5 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................5694.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H.....................................................................5694.5.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................5764.5.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................5794.5.4 Installing an ELU.....................................................................................................................................................5814.5.5 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................5824.5.6 (Optional) Installing the Filler Module...................................................................................................................5844.5.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................585



ix

4.6 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................5884.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................5894.6.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................5924.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel...................................................................................................5934.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02.........................................................................................................................................5954.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFU.................................................................................................................................5974.6.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................6014.7 Restructuring the IBBS200T......................................................................................................................................6064.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200T...................................................................6064.7.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................6104.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................6144.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable.................................................................................................6174.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables.....................................................................................................6204.9.1 Installing a BBU Case.............................................................................................................................................6204.9.2 Installing the BBU Components..............................................................................................................................6244.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06......................................................................................................................6274.9.4 Installing the SLPU.................................................................................................................................................6364.10 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................6384.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two Cabinets...........................................................................................................6384.10.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................6524.10.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................6694.10.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................6774.10.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................6844.10.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................6964.10.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................7054.10.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................7094.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables........................................................................................................7124.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables...................................................................................................7134.11 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................7154.12 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................7204.13 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................7304.13.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................7304.13.2 Sealing Cable Holes...............................................................................................................................................7304.13.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................733

5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).................7365.1 Introduction to Upgrade..............................................................................................................................................7385.1.1 Restructured Cabinets Interior.................................................................................................................................7385.1.2 Restructuring Process..............................................................................................................................................7465.2 Installation Preparations.............................................................................................................................................7485.2.1 Pre-upgrade Check..................................................................................................................................................7485.2.2 Upgrade Preparations..............................................................................................................................................749



x

5.2.3 Document Preparations............................................................................................................................................7495.2.4 Tools and Instruments.............................................................................................................................................7495.2.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel........................................................................................................7505.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................7515.4 Restructuring the APM30...........................................................................................................................................7525.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30........................................................................7525.4.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................7585.4.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................7615.4.4 Removing the APMI................................................................................................................................................7635.4.5 Replacing the AFMU...............................................................................................................................................7645.4.6 Replacing the Power System...................................................................................................................................7665.4.7 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee......................................................................................................7735.4.8 Installing the Filler Module and Filler Panel...........................................................................................................7745.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................7745.5 Restructuring the TMC...............................................................................................................................................7805.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC............................................................................7815.5.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................7855.5.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................7885.5.4 Removing the APMI................................................................................................................................................7905.5.5 Replacing the AFMU...............................................................................................................................................7915.5.6 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................7945.5.7 Installing the Filler Module and Filler Panel...........................................................................................................7965.5.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................7965.6 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................8025.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................8025.6.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................8065.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel...................................................................................................8075.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02.........................................................................................................................................8095.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFU.................................................................................................................................8115.6.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................8155.7 Restructuring the BBC................................................................................................................................................8205.7.1 Information You Need to Known Before Reconstructing the BBC........................................................................8205.7.2 Replacing the Wiring Terminals and Circuit Breakers............................................................................................8255.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................8285.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable.................................................................................................8315.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables.....................................................................................................8345.9.1 Installing a BBU Case.............................................................................................................................................8345.9.2 Installing the BBU Components..............................................................................................................................8375.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06......................................................................................................................8405.9.4 (Optional) Installing the Filler Module...................................................................................................................8505.9.5 Installing the SLPU.................................................................................................................................................851



xi

5.10 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................8535.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two Cabinets...........................................................................................................8535.10.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................8625.10.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................8785.10.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................8865.10.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................8935.10.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................9015.10.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................9075.10.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................9115.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables........................................................................................................9145.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables...................................................................................................9155.11 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................9175.12 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................9225.13 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................9325.13.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................9325.13.2 Sealing Cable Holes...............................................................................................................................................9325.13.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................935



xii

1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guidefor Enhancing Existing Cabinets

This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing ExistingCabinets.

06 (2014-04-30)This is the sixth commercial release.

Compared with 05 (2013-11-08), no topic is added or deleted from this issue.

Compared with 05 (2013-11-08), this issue incorporates the following change:

Topic Change Description

2.6.2 Replacing the Front Door Add the step of replacing an N-shaped fixing bracketof the door support lever.

05 (2013-11-08)This is the fifth commercial release.

Compared with 04 (2013-07-30), no topic is added or deleted from this issue.



3 Upgrade from BTS3900A(Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)'schild topics.

The filler module in APM30H(Ver.D_B) andTMC11H(Ver.D_B) is replaced with air baffle.

04 (2013-07-30)This is the fourth commercial release.

BTS3900AInstallation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for EnhancingExisting Cabinets


1

Compared with 03 (2013-04-28), this issue is added with the following topics:

l 2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C) and it's child topics.

Compared with 03 (2013-04-28), no information is modified or deleted.

03 (2013-04-28)

This is the third commercial release.

Compared with 02 (2012-12-30), no topic is added or deleted.



The whole document Changed the document name from BTS3900AHardware Upgrade Guide to BTS3900A InstallationGuide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

l 2.11.7 (Optional) InstallingInter-BBU Signal Cables



Modified the steps of binding and routing the inter-BBU signal cable.

2.6.2 Replacing the Front Door Changed the steps of removing the front door.

02 (2012-12-30)

This is the second commercial release.

Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), this issue is added with the following topics:

l 4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) and it's child topics.

l 5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1) and it'schild topics.

Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), no information is modified.

Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), no information is deleted.

01 (2012-11-08)

This is the first commercial release.

Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), no topic is added.

Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:




2


The whole document Renamed the BTS3900A (Ver.D2_B) BTS3900A(Ver.D_B).

2.10.1 Installing the BBU Case Added the attentions of installing BBU power cableson a running base station.

l (Optional) Installing the RRUPower Cable

l (Optional) Installing the RRUPower Cable

Added the attentions of installing RRU power cableson a running base station.

Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), this issue deletes the following topics:l "Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.D1) to BTS3900A (Ver.D2)" and it's child topics.

Draft B (2012-10-10)This is a draft.

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), this issue is added with the following topics:l 3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B) and it's child topics.

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), no information is changed.

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), no information is deleted.

Draft A (2012-09-15)This is a draft.




3

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_C)

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.C)to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).

2.1 Installation PreparationsThis chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It alsospecifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.

2.2 Application ScenariosMultiple cabinets can be configured and installed for the BTS3900A to meet the requirementsfor different RF unit configurations, backup power capacity, and space for customer equipment.A BTS3900A can be configured with only RFUs or both RFUs and RRUs depending on differentscenarios.

2.3 Unpacking CheckUnpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.

2.4 Restructuring ProcessThis section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade of BTS3900A(Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C).

2.5 Powering Off the Base StationThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for powering off the base station.

2.6 Restructuring the APM30H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30Hcabinet to be restructured.

2.7 Restructuring the TMC11H CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11Hcabinet to be restructured.

2.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet


2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_C)


4

This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFCcabinet to be restructured.

2.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200Dor IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.

2.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their CablesThis chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting themodules to external devices.

2.11 Installing Cables Between Two CabinetsThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade.

2.12 Installation ChecklistAfter the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installationenvironment, and cable-related items.

2.13 Powering On a Base StationThis section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supplyto the components in a cabinet.

2.14 Subsequent OperationsThis section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgradedand checked.




5


2.1.1 Pre-upgrade CheckThis section describes the operations that must be taken before the hardware upgrade.

You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:l Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properly

before the upgrade.l Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.

Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need tocontact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.

2.1.2 Upgrade PreparationsThis section describes the preparations needed for the upgrade.

Table 2-1 lists the requirements on the current software version of the base station before theupgrade.

Table 2-1 Versions before the upgrade

Product Name Version before Upgrade

SingleRAN7.0 series V100R007C00SPC240 and later


2.1.3 DocumentsThis section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.

l Before the installation, familiarize yourself with related information in the followingdocuments:

– 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description– 3900 Series Base Station Cables– BBU3900 Hardware Description– RFU Hardware Description– BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Installation Guide– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide– BTS3900A (Ver.B) Site Maintenance Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Site Maintenance

Guide– Safety Precautions




6

l During the installation, refer to the following document:

– Installation Reference

2.1.4 Tools and InstrumentsThis section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation.

Marker Phillips screwdriver (M3 toM6)

Flat-head screwdriver (M3 toM6)

Diagonal pliers

32 mm (1.26 in.)combination wrench

Socket wrench Torque wrench

Power cable crimping tool RJ45 crimping tool Cable cutter

Rubber mallet Soldering iron Wire stripper

Hammer drill (Φ16) Heat gun Level

Multimeter Measuring tape Vacuum cleaner

ESD wrist strap ESD gloves Torque screwdriver




7

Gloves - -

2.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite PersonnelOnsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsitepersonnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.

Before the installation, pay attention to the following items:

l The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with theproper installation and operation methods.

l The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installationenvironment. Generally, only three to five onsite personnel are necessary.


2.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUsOnly

When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for theBTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and -48 V DC power supplyscenario.

Cabinet Configuration Principlesl A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.

l The maximum cabinet configuration of a BTS3900A site is 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. There must be a clearance of 40 mm (1.57 in.) betweenthe cabinets installed side by side.

l The RFC can only be stacked below the APM30H or TMC11H.

l The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, orTMC11H. The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can only be stacked below the TMC11H.

l When a site is configured with over six RFUs and only one IBBS200D or IBBS200T, theIBBS200D or IBBS200T must be configured with at least two groups of 92 Ah storagebatteries to avoid overcurrent of a single battery group during discharging.




8

l If an auxiliary cabinet such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H is required duringinitial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basiccabinet. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinetis positioned on the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on thebattery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.

l During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in thefuture. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain inthe original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In aspecial scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets.

l When a BTS3900A is configured with two BBUs and both BBUs are connected to RFUs,the BBUs must be interconnected.

l A BTS3900A configured with one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU bydefault. It can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumptionof all BBU boards cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to a new or expansionscenario.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-mode Base StationA single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, and the BBU is installedin the APM30H or TMC11H. When seven to twelve RFUs need to be configured, two RFCs arerequired.

Table 2-2 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station withdifferent backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.

Table 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station

PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity

Space forCustomerEquipment

CarrierConfiguration

Cabinet Configuration

110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC

≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1TMC11H

≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1TMC11H

Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided byone batterycabinet

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T

l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T




9

PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1TMC11H

≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H

Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided bytwo batterycabinets

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H

≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H

-48 V DC - ≤ 9 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 TMC11H+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs 1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

≤ 20 U ≤ 6 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipmentand carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-1.




10

Figure 2-1 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is nobackup power

NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 2-1 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1 TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the originalconfiguration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H.

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-2 andFigure 2-3.




11

Figure 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by an IBBS200D/IBBS200T




12


When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-4.




13

Figure 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by two battery cabinets

NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 2-4 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H is the initialconfiguration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode basestation in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurationsare shown in Figure 2-5.




14

Figure 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 2-5 are two modes of configuring 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs. (A) indicates that 2TMC11Hs+2 RFCs is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the originalconfiguration of 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC.

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base StationTwo BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:l Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30H

and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the

BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

Table 2-3 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different backuppower capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.

Table 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station

PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower

≤ 3 U ≤ 12 RFUs(1)

1 APM30H+2 RFCs




15

PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1TMC11H

Backuppowerprovided bya singlebatterycabinet

≤ 3 U l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T


≤ 14 U l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H


Backuppowerprovided bytwo batterycabinets

≤ 3 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H

-48 V DC - ≤ 7 U 1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

≤ 18 U 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

NOTE

(1) A maximum of 12 RFUs are supported by a triple-mode base station. If there are more than 12 RFUs,an extra base station is required.

In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment areshown in Figure 2-6.




16

Figure 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is notrequired

When a single cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station withdifferent space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-7.




17

Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby a single battery cabinet

When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-8.




18

Figure 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby two battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station areshown in Figure 2-9.




19

Figure 2-9 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

2.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUsand RRUs

When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for theBTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and –48 V DC power supplyscenario.

Cabinet Configuration Principlesl A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and nine RRUs.

Therefore, more than one BTS3900As must be deployed if more than six RFUs and nineRRUs are required.

l When a BTS3900A is configured with both RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is needed tobe installed in RFC, the maximum configuration of RRUs is six RRUs of 2*60 W and threeRRUs of 2*40 W.

l When both the RFU and RRU support the GSM mode, the BBU3900 must be configuredwith a GTMUb. In addition, the RFUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to theGTMUb, and the RRUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the UBRI.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base StationA single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in theAPM30H or TMC11H.




20



PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs+9RRUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

≤ 16 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1TMC11H

Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided byone storagebatterycabinet





Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided bytwo storagebatterycabinets

≤ 5 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 16 U 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H

-48 V DC - ≤ 9 U 1 TMC11H+1 RFC

≤ 20 U 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC





21

Figure 2-10 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there isno backup power

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-11.

Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by one battery cabinet




22



When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-modebase station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrierconfigurations are shown in Figure 2-13.

Figure 2-13 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DCscenario

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station

Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:

l Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30Hand transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, theBBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.




23



PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower


1 APM30H+1 RFC










-48 V DC - ≤ 7 U 1 TMC11H+1 RFC


In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment andcarrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-14.




24


When a single battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure2-15 and Figure 2-16.




25

Figure 2-15 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby one IBBS200D/IBBS200T




26


When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure2-17.




27


When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station inthe case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shownin Figure 2-18.




28



ContextNOTE

When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:

l Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.

l Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweat-soaked gloves, or dirty gloves.

NOTICEl Powered on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it.

l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it.

Procedure

Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.




29

If... Then...

The total number tallies with the packinglist

Go to Step 2.

The total number does not tally with thepacking list

Find out the cause and report any missingarticles to the local Huawei office.

Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case.

If... Then...

The exterior of the packing case is intact Go to Step 3.

The outer packing is severely damaged orsoaked


The mark on the shockwatch label is red. Do not open the case. Claim compensationfrom the transportation company.

Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list.

If... Then...

Types and quantity of the article tally withthose on the packing list

Sign the Packing List with the customer.

There are any goods missing, incorrectlydelivered, or damaged

Send feedback to the local Huawei office.

CAUTIONTo protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep theunpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment,packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file thephotos.

----End





30

Restructuring Process in AC Scenarios

Figure 2-19 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied withAC power.

Figure 2-19 Restructuring process

Restructuring Process in DC Scenarios

Figure 2-20 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied withDC power.




31






32

Context

From MBTS V100R009C00 onwards, the name of the element management system (EMS) ischanged from M2000 to U2000.

Procedure

Step 1 Optional: If a replaced RFU is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking for TXchannels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.

NOTE

l If a replaced RFU is faulty, its maximum output power locking for TX channels does not need to bedisabled.

l If the maximum output power has not been set for the RFU, the maximum output power for TX channelsis the maximum transmit power of the hardware.

1. Check the maximum output power has been locked for TX channels of the new RFU, andrecord the result.

l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinetnumber, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU. Run theDSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number,and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum output power forTX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has been locked.

l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query thecabinet number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU.Run the DSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number,slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximumoutput power for TX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power hasbeen locked.

l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site MaintenanceTerminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-clickLock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Query Config tab. On the displayed tab page,select the target RFU.

If... Then...

The maximum output power has beenlocked for TX channels

Go to Step 1.2.

The maximum output power has not beenlocked for TX channels

Go to 2.

NOTE

The maximum output power of some RFUs cannot be queried by running the DSP TXBRANCHcommand. If the value of the maximum output power invalid in the query result for an RFU, the RFUdoes not support the maximum output power locking.

2. Set the maximum output power of the RFU to 0 to disable the maximum output powerlocking.

l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable themaximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to reset




33

the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum outputpower of each RFU is set successfully.

l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disablethe maximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command toreset the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximumoutput power of each RFU is set successfully.

l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site MaintenanceTerminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-clickLock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Config tab. On the displayed tab page, setthe parameters to disable the maximum output power locking for TX channels, and clickSet. Reset the RFU to make the configuration take effect.

NOTE

If there is more than one RFU, reset the TX channels of each RFU separately. If RFUs are cascaded,perform the operations from the lowest-level RFU to the highest-level RFU to minimize the impacton services carried by the RFUs.

Step 2 Ask the M2000/U2000 administrator to block the RFU.

l On the NodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.

l On the eNodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.

l On the BSC, run the SET GTRXADMSTAT command and set ADMSTAT to LOCK toblock all carriers of the RFU.

NOTE

l Block the RFU before replacing the module or separately replacing the RF jumper.

l If RFU to be replaced works in multiple modes, block the RFU in all modes it supports.

l An RFU working in GSM mode cannot be blocked, and therefore you can block only the carriers ofthe RFU in GSM mode.

Step 3 Verify that TX channels of the RFU are disabled. In this case, the ACT indicator on the RFUpanel is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).

Step 4 Power off the RFC.

If... Then...

RFC(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 in the RFC.

RFC(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11A in the RFC.

Step 5 Power off the TMC.

If... Then...

TMC11H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C in theTMC.

TMC11H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C in theTMC.




34

Step 6 Switch off all circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200T or IBBS200D.

Step 7 Power off the APM30H.

If... Then...

APM30H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPS in the APM30H.

APM30H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPU in the APM30H.

Step 8 Turn off the switch on the external power equipment for the BTS3900A.

----End


2.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theAPM30H

This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the APM30H.

Component Changes in the APM30HFigure 2-21 shows component changes in the APM30H.

Figure 2-21 Components in the APM30H




35

No. Component

Change Type

Description

1 FAN 02A To bereplaced

The FAN 02A needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D toenhance the heat dissipation capability.

2 SLPU Reused -

3 ELU To bereplaced

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.

4 PSU (AC/DC)

To bereplaced

The PSUs need to be replaced to enhance the powerdistribution capability.

5 Door statussensor

Reused -

6 EPS 01subrack

To bereplaced

The EPS 01 subrack needs to be replaced with anEPU05A to meet higher requirements for the powersystem.

7 BBU3900 Reused -

8 GATM To beremoved

-

9 EMUA Reused -

10 AC heater Reused -

11 SOU Reused -

12 Front door To bereplaced

The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heatdissipation capacity of the cabinet.

13 Junctionbox

Reused -

14 PMU To bereplaced

The PMU needs to be replaced to enhance the powerdistribution capability.

15 FAN 02B To bereplaced

The FAN 02B needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D toenhance the heat dissipation capability.

16 EPU03Asubrack

To bereplaced

The EPS 03A subrack needs to be replaced with anEPU05A to meet higher requirements for the powersystem.




36

No. Component

Change Type

Description



Cable Changes in the APM30HFigure 2-22 lists the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the APM30H.

Figure 2-22 Equipotential cable and power cables in the APM30H




37

No.

Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType

Connector InstallationPosition


P1

Inputpowercable forajunctionbox

Both ends areOTterminals.

l One endconnectsto the L1and N1terminalsin the ACOUTPUTterminalbox of theEPS.

l The otherendconnectsto the Land Nterminalsin thejunctionbox.


l One endconnects to theL1 and N1terminals in theAC OUTPUTterminal box ofthe EPU.

l The other endconnects to theL and Nterminals in thejunction box.

Reused

P2

Powercable forthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H

l One endis a tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).

l The otherend is a3V3connector.

l One endconnectsto theLOAD0port onthe EPS.

l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton the fanassemblyin theAPM30H.



l One endconnects to theLOAD5 port onthe EPU.

l The other endconnects to thePWR port onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.

Tobereplaced




38

No.




P3

BBUpowercable




l The otherendconnectsto the-48V porton theUPEU inthe BBU.



l One endconnects to theBBU_0 orBBU_1 port onthe EPU.

l The other endconnects to the-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU.

Tobereplaced

P4

EMUApowercable

l Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype)

l The otherend iscord endterminals.


l The otherendconnectsto thePWR1port ontheEMUA.




l The other endconnects to thePWR1 port onthe EMUA.

Theycanbeusedcontinuouslyandtheirconnectorsneedto bereplacedonsite.




39

No.




P5

SOUpowercable

l One endis OTterminals.

l The otherend is aC13connector.

l One endconnectsto the M4groundscrew,L1, andN1terminals(ACOUTPUT) on theEPS.

l The otherendconnectsto the ACINPUTport onthe SOU.



l One endconnects to theM4 groundscrew, L1, andN1 terminals(AC OUTPUT)on the EPU.

l The other endconnects to theAC INPUT porton the SOU.

Reused

P6

Heaterpowercable



l One endconnectsto the ACoutputwiringterminalin the ACjunctionbox andthegroundbar in theAPM30Hcabinet

l The otherendconnectsto thepowerinput porton theheater.



l One endconnects to theAC outputwiring terminalin the ACjunction boxand the groundbar in theAPM30Hcabinet

l The other endconnects to thepower inputport on theheater.

Reused




40

No.




P7

Equipotentialcable forthe frontdoor


l One endconnectsto thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.

l The otherendconnectsto thegroundpoint onthebottomleft of thecabinet.


l One endconnects to theground point onthe front door.

l The other endconnects to theground point onthe bottom leftof the cabinet.

Tobereplaced

Figure 2-23 shows the signal cable changes in the APM30H.

Figure 2-23 Signal cable changes in the APM30H




41

No. Cable APM30H (Ver.B) APM30H (Ver.C) ChangeType

Connector Installation Position


S1 Environment monitoringsignal cable

Both endsare DB50maleconnectors.

l One endconnectsto theCOMport onthePMU.

l Theotherendconnectsto thePMU_DB50 porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.



l Theother endconnectsto thePMU_DB50 porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.

Removed

S2 Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatussensor in theAPM30H

l One endis a 2-pinconnector.

l Theotherend isbarewires.

l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.

l Theotherendconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.



l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H.

l Theother endconnectsto thedoorstatussensor.

Reused




42




S3 Monitoringsignaltransfercable

Both endsare RJ45connectors.

l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN porton thePMU.

l Theotherendconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.


l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN port onthePMU.

l Theother endconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.

To bereplaced

S4 CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable


l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.

l Theotherendconnectsto theMON0port ontheUPEU intheBBU.

- - To bereplaced




43




S5 ELU signalcable


l One endconnectsto theELU.

l Theotherendconnectsto theELUport onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.



l Theother endconnectsto theELU porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.

Reused

S6 Monitoringsignal cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor

Both endsare 4-pinconnectors.

l One endconnectsto thetransferbox inthe frontdoor oftheAPM30H.

l Theotherendconnectsto theFAN_EXT porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.



l Theother endconnectsto theFAN_EXT porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.

To bereplaced




44




S7 EMUAmonitoringsignal cable

l One endis a DB9maleconnector.

l Theother isan RJ45connector.

l One endconnectsto theRS-485port ontheEMUA.

l Theotherendconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thePMU.




l Theother endconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thePMU.

Reused

S8 Surgeprotectiontransfercable for themonitoringsignals


l One endconnectsto theOUT0port ontheUSLP2in theSLPU.

l Theotherendconnectsto theEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEU intheBBU.



l Theother endconnectsto theEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEU inthe BBU.

Reused




45




S9 GPS clocksignal cable

l One endis anSMAmaleconnector.

l Theotherend is anN-typefemaleconnector.

l One endconnectsto theGPS porton theUSCU intheBBU.

l Theotherendconnectsto a GPSsurgeprotector.



l One endconnectsto theGPS porton theUSCU inthe BBU.

l Theother endconnectsto a GPSsurgeprotector.

Reused

S10 CMUE-BBUmonitoringsignal cable

- - Both endsare RJ45connectors.

l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN port onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H.

l Theother endconnectsto theMON0port ontheUPEU inthe BBU.

To bereplaced

2.6.2 Replacing the Front DoorThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door. The front doorsof the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures for removingthe front doors of the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.




46

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.

Procedure

Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.

Step 2 Turn off the fan in the front door.

If... Then...

AnAPM30H(Ver.B) isused

Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.

ATMC11H(Ver.B) isused

Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker controlspower supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.

AnAPM30H(Ver.C) isused

Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fanassembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.

ATMC11H(Ver.C) isused


Step 3 Remove the front door to be replaced.1. Remove the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door from the transfer box, as

shown in Figure 2-24.




47

Figure 2-24 Removing the connector from the monitoring signal cable for the fan in thefront door

2. Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown

in Figure 2-25.

Figure 2-25 Removing the equipotential cable for the door of the cabinet

3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two hinges from the front door, and remove thefront door, as shown in Figure 2-26.




48

Figure 2-26 Removing the front door

Step 4 Install the new front door.

NOTE

l When installing the front door, use new removable pins.

l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the front door before delivery.

1. Install the new front door and insert the removable pins.2. Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on an inner wall.

Step 5 Replace an N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever.1. Remove the two M4 screws on the left N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever

and pull out the door support lever from the right N-shaped fixing bracket. Then move theleft N-shaped fixing bracket to the right part of the door support lever and remove the leftN-shaped fixing bracket, as shown in the following figure.




49

Figure 2-27 Remove an N-shaped fixing bracket

2. Take out and slide a new N-shaped fixing bracket onto the right part of the door supportlever and move it to the left part of the lever. Use two M4 screws to secure the new N-shaped fixing bracket, with a torque of 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), and place the right part ofthe door support lever in its original position, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 2-28 Install a new N-shaped fixing bracket




50

Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the number onthe barcode label starts from 212102, as shown by 1 in Figure 2-29.

If... Then...

There is a barcode label in the indicatedposition

Proceed with the next step.

There is no barcode label in the indicatedposition

Record the barcode (shown by 2 in Figure2-29) on the front door, and stick a barcodelabel carrying the same barcode to theindicated position.

Figure 2-29 Positions of the barcode labels

(1) Position of the barcode label on an inner wall of thecabinet

(2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of thecabinet

Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.

----End

2.6.3 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The fanassemblies in the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the proceduresfor removing the fan assemblies from the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Procedure

Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.




51


Step 2 Optional: Remove the power cable for the fan assembly to power off the fan assembly. Skipthis step if this cable has been disconnected during the replacement of the front door.

If... Then...

An APM30H(Ver.B) is used


A TMC11H(Ver.B) is used

Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breakercontrols power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.

An APM30H(Ver.C) is used


A TMC11H(Ver.C) is used


Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fan

assembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 2-30.

NOTE

The procedure for removing a fan assembly from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H(Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) are the same. Figure 2-30 uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.




52

Figure 2-30 Removing the fan assembly

DANGERWhen removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fanassembly.

Step 4 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.

Step 5 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position and tightenthe four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown inFigure 2-31. The recommended torque is 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).

NOTE

When installing the new fan assembly, ensure that the air exhaust vent of the fan assembly is on the top.




53

Figure 2-31 Installing the new fan assembly


----End

2.6.4 Replacing the ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit(ELU).

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context

The ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-32.

Figure 2-32 Position of the ELU




54

Procedure



Step 2 Remove the ELU.

1. Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.

2. Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,as shown in Figure 2-33.

Figure 2-33 Opening the housing of the ELU

3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown inFigure 2-34.

Figure 2-34 Removing the ELU

Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.

Step 4 Install a new ELU.




55

NOTE

l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure2-35. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 2-6.

Figure 2-35 Position of the barcode label

(1) Barcode label on the ELU (2) BOM code

Table 2-6 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets

Cabinet Type BOM Code on the ELU

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed basestation

l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macrobase station

l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmissionequipment

l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 anduses the -48 V DC power supply

l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395

RFC (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113818l Ver.C: 02113390

IBBS200D (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113819l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480

IBBS200T (Ver.B) l Ver.B: 02113820l Ver.C: 02113397

1. Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. Therecommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

2. Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.

3. Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.




56

Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic labelinformation of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplatein the upgrade package.l If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.l If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,

locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.


----End

2.6.5 Replacing the Power SystemThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power system.

PrerequisitesBefore replacing the power system, ensure that the entire base station has been powered off.

Contextl Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.l The procedure for replacing the power system of the APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H

(Ver.C) is the same. The figures in this section uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.l Figure 2-36 shows component changes in the AC/DC power system.




57

Figure 2-36 Component changes in the AC/DC power system

(1) PMU 01B (2) PSU(EPW30-48A)

(3) EPS 01subrack

(4) PSU(PSU4850A)

(5) EPU03Asubrack

(6) PMU 11A (7) PSU(R4850G2)

(8) EPU05Asubrack

Procedure



Step 2 Remove cables from the EPS or EPU.1. Disconnect the ground cable for the EPS or EPU from the ground bar on the inner left wall

of the cabinet.2. Loosen the two captive screws on the metal protective cover on the left side of the EPS or

EPU, and then remove the protective cover.3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the plastic protective covers from the AC input and

output wiring terminal blocks on the left side of the EPS or EPU.4. Record the connections of the AC input power cable and AC output power cable, and then

remove the cables.




58

5. Reinstall the two plastic protective covers, and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M4screws to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

6. Record the connections of the DC power cables on the EPS or EPU panel, and then removethe DC power cables.

7. Record the connections of the DC power cables that are connected to the power cables onthe right side of the EPS or EPU, and then remove the DC power cables.

Step 3 Remove the PMU and all PSUs from the EPS or EPU.

NOTICEThe original EPS or EPU contains one PMU and three PSUs and therefore is heavy. You areadvised to remove the PMU and PSUs before removing the EPS or EPU.

1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of eachPSU.

2. Pull the handle slightly to slide each PSU out of the subrack and remove each PSU fromthe subrack, as shown in Figure 2-37.

Figure 2-37 Removing the PSUs

3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of the

PMU.4. Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU out of the subrack and remove the PMU from the

subrack, as shown in Figure 2-38.




59

Figure 2-38 Removing the PMU

Step 4 Remove the plate for the power series 120 connector from the right side of the EPS or EPU, asshown in Figure 2-39.

Figure 2-39 Removing the plate for the power series 120 connector

Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the remaining seven screws from both sides of the EPS orEPU, and remove the EPS or EPU from the cabinet along the guide rails slowly, as shown inFigure 2-40.

NOTICEThe EPS or EPU subrack is heavy. Therefore, you need to hold the subrack with one hand andsupport the bottom with the other hand to slowly pull the subrack out of the cabinet. This preventsthe subrack from falling and ensures personal safety.




60

Figure 2-40 Removing the EPS or EPU

Step 6 Remove the metal support from the left side of the EPS or EPU.

1. Loosen the two captive screws on the cover plate of the metal support.

2. Remove the two screws from the metal support and remove the metal support, as shown inFigure 2-41.

Figure 2-41 Removing the metal support

Step 7 Place the removed EPS or EPU subrack, PSUs, PMU, and metal support into an ESD box orbag.




61

Step 8 Optional: Install the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall ofthe cabinet. Only an APM30H (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an APM30H(Ver.C) is used, skip this step.

CAUTIONIf a guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature willincrease by 2°C to 3°C at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will reportovertemperature alarms if the environmental temperature is high.

1. Remove the guide rails on the left side of the position where the EPS or EPU is originallyinstalled, as shown by a in Figure 2-42. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve the screws.

2. Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mountingbar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton paddingcontacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in Figure 2-42.

3. Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 8.1 to secure the guide rails and tighten the screwsto 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown by c in Step 8.1.

Figure 2-42 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner leftside of the cabinet

Step 9 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet. If there areother modules installed at the bottom of the cabinet, skip this step.1. Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton

padding for about 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in Figure 2-43.2. Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completely

strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of thecabinet, as shown by b and c in Figure 2-43.




62

Figure 2-43 Installing windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet

Step 10 Install the windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet, as shown in Figure2-44.


1. Remove the M6 screw at the bottom of the right mounting bar.2. Place the windproof cotton padding next to the inner right wall of the cabinet, use two M6

screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).




63

Figure 2-44 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet

Step 11 Install a new EPU.1. Place the new EPU on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the power system

into the cabinet.2. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven panel screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.) and one

hex screw to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.) so that the EPU subrack is secured.3. Use M6x12 screws to secure the ground cable for the new EPU to the ground bar. The

recommended torque is 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

----End

2.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-TeeThis section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.

Prerequisitesl The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. When

DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.l If the BTS3900A has two GATMs, remove the upper one before the lower one.

Procedure

Step 1 Power off the GATM. The following table lists the terminals that can be used by a GATM powercable, which may differ from the actually used terminal.




64

If... Then...


Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATMpower cable from the LOAD4 port on the EPS.

If anAPM30H(Ver.C) isused

Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATMpower cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPU.

Step 2 Remove the GATM.

1. Remove the monitoring signal cable from the GATM panel.

2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the ground cable for the GATM. Then use a wrenchto remove the RF jumper from the GATM.

3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, remove theGATM, and secure the removed screws on their original positions on the mounting bar, asshown in Figure 2-45.

NOTE

The method of removing the GATM from an APM30H (Ver.B) is the same as the method of removing itfrom an APM30H (Ver.C). The following figure uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.

Figure 2-45 Removing the GATM

Step 3 Remove the Bias-Tee.

1. Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable and PGND cable.

2. Remove the Bias-Tee.

3. Use a wrench to connect the jumper and the feeder to 25 N·m to 35 N·m (221.25 lbf·in. to309.75 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 2-46.




65

Figure 2-46 Connecting the jumper and the feeder

(1) Feeder (2) Jumper

----End

2.6.7 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30H cabinetafter you restructure the APM30H.

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.

ContextTable 2-7 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.

Table 2-7 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet

Cable Connectorat One End

Installation Position

Connectorat the OtherEnd


Remarks

Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe APM30H

EPC4connector

LOAD2 porton the EPU

3V3connector

PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe APM30H

A 1.1 m (3.61ft) cable isnewlydelivered.




66





Remarks

Input powercable for thejunction box

OT terminals(M4)

M4 groundscrew aswell as L1,and N1terminalsnear the ACOUTPUTsilkscreen onthe EPU intheAPM30H

OT terminals L and Nterminals inthe junctionbox

To be reused

EMUApower cable

EPC4connector


Cord endterminals

PWR1 porton theEMUA

To be reused.Theconnector atone endneeds to bereplaced.

BBU powercable

EPC4connector

LOAD0 orLOAD6 porton the EPU

3V3connector

-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU

A cable isnewlydelivered.

Table 2-8 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.

Table 2-8 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet


InstallationPosition



Remarks

Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensorin theAPM30H

2-pinconnector

GATE porton the PMU

Bare wire Door statussensor

To be reused

ELU signalcable

RJ45connector

ELU RJ45connector

ELU port inthe CMUEA

To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor

Interconnection terminal

Power cablefor the fan inthe front doorof theAPM30H

4-pinconnector

FAN_EXTport on thefan assembly





67





Remarks

CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA

RJ45connector

MON1 porton the UPEUin the BBU

A 1.1 m(3.61 ft)cable isnewlydelivered.

Monitoringsignaltransfercable

RJ45connector

COM_INport on thePMU

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe fanassembly ofthe APM30H


EMUAmonitoringsignal cable

DB9 maleconnector

RS-485 porton theEMUA

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on thePMU

To be reused

Procedurel Remove related cables in the cabinet.

Remove the related cables listed in Table 2-7 and Table 2-8. If the cables have beenremoved during the module replacement, skip this step.

l Install power cables in the APM30H.

1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the APM30H, as shown by P1 in Figure2-47.

a. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD2 port on the panel of the EPU.

b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD2 porton the EPU.

c. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe fan assembly in the APM30H, and use a torque wrench to tighten the screwson the 3V3 connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).

2. Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-47.

a. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For detailed operations, seeAssembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling theEPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD5 port on the panel of the EPU.

c. Connect the one end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD5port on the EPU.

d. Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 porton the EMUA.

3. Install input power cable for the junction box, as shown by P3 in Figure 2-47.




68

a. Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L1 and N1terminals near the AC OUTPUT silkscreen on the EPU, and tighten the terminalsto 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

b. Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L andN terminals in the junction box, and tighten the terminals to 1.2 N·m (10.62lbf·in.).

4. Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P4 in Figure 2-47.

a. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to theinstructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

b. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD0 or LOAD1 port on the panel ofthe EPU.

c. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD0 orLOAD1 port on the EPU.

d. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on theUPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).

Figure 2-47 Installing power cables in the APM30H

5. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind the cable.

6. Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

l Install signal cables in the APM30H.

1. Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-48.




69

a. Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on thetop of the ELU.

b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU porton the fan assembly.

2. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure2-48.

a. Connect one end of the signal cable to the GATE port on the PMU.b. Connect the other end of the signal cable to the door status sensor.

3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door, as shown by S3 inFigure 2-48.

a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door toits transfer terminal.

b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with a 4-pin connector to the FAN_EXTport on the fan assembly.

4. Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S4 in Figure 2-48.

a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to theCOM_IN port on the CMUEA.

b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector tothe MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

5. Install the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 2-48.

a. Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.

b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_INport on the PMU.

6. Optional: Install the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, as shown by S6 in Figure2-48.

a. Connect the end of the signal cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS485 porton the EMUA, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).

b. Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the PMU.




70

Figure 2-48 Installing signal cables in the APM30H

7. Optional: Install the surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals.

a. Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of theSLPU.

b. Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in theBBU.

c. Connect the other three surge protection transfer cables, as shown in Figure2-49.

Figure 2-49 Connections of surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals


9. Label the installed cables according to Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End




71


2.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theTMC11H Cabinet

This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the TMC11H cabinet.

Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Components in the TMC11HCabinet

There are two types of TMC11Hs:l One type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration A in

Figure 2-50.l The other type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as

shown in illustration B in Figure 2-50.




72

Figure 2-50 Exterior and configurations of the TMC11H

No. Component

Change Type

Remarks

1 Fanassembly

To bereplaced

The fan assembly needs to be replaced to enhance theheat dissipation capacity.

2 SLPU To bereused

-

3 ELU To bereplaced


4 DCDU-03C

To bereplaced

It needs to be replaced with the DCDU-12B orDCDU-12C.




73

No. Component

Change Type

Remarks

5 BBU3900 To bereused

-

6 Door statussensor

To bereused

-

7 Environmentmonitoringunit type A(EMUA)

To bereused

-

8 AC heater To bereused

-


The heat exchanger in the cabinet needs to be replacedto enhance the heat dissipation capacity of the cabinet.

10 Junctionbox

To bereused

-

11 DCDU-11B, orDCDU-11C

To bereplaced


Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Cables in the TMC11HCabinet

Figure 2-51 shows the power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet that housesthe BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power.

Figure 2-51 Power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet




74

No. Cable TMC11H(Ver.B) TMC11H(Ver.C) ChangeType

Connector


Connector


P1 Powercable forthe fanassembly intheTMC11H


l Theotherend is a3V3connector.

l One endconnects to theLOAD8port ontheDCDU-03C.

l Theotherendconnects to thePWRport onthe fanassembly in theTMC11H.





To bereplaced

P2 BBU powercable




l Theotherendconnects to the-48Vport ontheUPEUin theBBU.



l One endconnects to theLOAD6orLOAD7port ontheDCDU-11C.


To bereplaced




75


Connector


Connector


P3 EMUApowercable

l One endis tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfittype).

l Theotherend iscordendterminals.


l Theotherendconnects to thePWR1port ontheEMUA.





They can beusedcontinuously and theirconnectorsneed to bereplacedonsite.

P4 Equipotential cable forgroundingof the frontdoor

Both endsare OTterminals.

l One endconnects to thegroundpoint onthe frontdoor.

l Theotherendconnects to thegroundpoint onthebottomleft ofthecabinet.




To bereplaced

Figure 2-52 shows the signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses the BBU3900 and issupplied with -48 V DC power.




76

Figure 2-52 Signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet


Connector


Connector


S1 Monitoring signalcable forthe doorstatussensor

l Oneend is a2-pinconnector.


l Oneendconnects totheGATEport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.

l Theotherendconnects tothedoorstatussensor.





To bereused




77


Connector


Connector


S2 CMUA-BBUmonitoring signalcable


l Oneendconnects totheCOM_IN porton thefanassembly intheTMC11H.

l Theotherendconnects totheMON0port ontheUPEUin theBBU.

- - To bereplaced




78


Connector


Connector


S3 ELUsignalcable


l Theotherendconnects totheELUport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.

l Oneendconnects totheELU.




To bereused




79


Connector


Connector


S4 Monitoring signalcable forthe fan inthe frontdoor


l Theotherendconnects totheFAN_EXTport onthe fanassembly intheTMC11H.

l Oneendconnects tothetransfer box inthefrontdoor oftheTMC11H.




To bereplaced




80


Connector


Connector


S5 EMUAmonitoring signalcable

l Oneend is aDB9maleconnector.

l Theother isanRJ45connector.

l Theotherendconnects totheCOM_OUTport onthe fanassembly.

l Oneendconnects totheRS-485 porton theEMUA.





To bereused




81


Connector


Connector


S6 Surgeprotectiontransfercable forthemonitoring signals


l Oneendconnects totheOUT0port ontheUSLP2in theSLPU.

l Theotherendconnects totheEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEUin theBBU.




To bereused

S7 GPS clocksignalcable

l Oneend isanSMAmaleconnector.

l Theotherend isan N-typefemaleconnector.

l Oneendconnects totheGPSport ontheUSCUin theBBU.

l Theotherendconnects to aGPSsurgeprotector.





To bereplaced




82


Connector


Connector


S8 CMUE-BBUmonitoring signalcable




To bereplaced


Prerequisites

The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.

Procedure





83



If... Then...














84



in Figure 2-54.






85



NOTE









86







87


If... Then...









----End

2.7.3 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.


Procedure





88


Step 2 (Optional) Turn off the circuit breaker LOAD8 on the DCDU-03C. Skip this step if the fanassembly has been powered off during replacement of the front door.

Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.

1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.

2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fanassembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 2-59.

NOTE








89


NOTE




----End



ContextThe ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-61.




90


Procedure











91




NOTE








l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195


l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393


l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398


l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395




92






2. Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.3. Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.

Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic labelinformation of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplatein the upgrade package.

l If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.

l If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.


----End

2.7.5 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDUs in an TMC11H.These DCDUs include the DCDU-03B, DCDU-03C, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-11C.

Prerequisites

The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context

The following table helps you determine whether a DCDU needs to be replaced with aDCDU-12B or DCDU-12C.

Cabinet Base Station ApplicationScenarios

DCDU ModelBeforeReplacement

DCDU ModelAfterReplacement

TMC11H(Ver.B)

DBS3900 It providestransmissionspace.

DCDU-03C DCDU-12C




93




It houses theBBU3900 and issupplied with-48 V DCpower.

DCDU-03B DCDU-12B

BTS3900A It providestransmissionspace.

DCDU-03C DCDU-12C


DCDU-03C DCDU-12C

TMC11H(Ver.C)


DCDU-11C DCDU-12C


DCDU-11B DCDU-12B


DCDU-11C DCDU-12C


DCDU-11C DCDU-12C

Procedure






94

Step 2 Power off the DCDU according to the following table.

If... Then...

A DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B needs to bepowered off

Switch off the external power supply.

A DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C in a TMC11Hneeds to be powered off, and the TMC11H onlyprovides transmission space

Turn off the TMC circuit breaker on theEPS in the APM30H.

At a BTS3900A site, a DCDU-03C in aTMC11H needs to be powered off, and theTMC11H houses BBU3900 and is suppliedwith -48 V DC power

Turn off the SPARE2 circuit breaker on theDCDU-01 in the RFC.

A DCDU-11C in a TMC11H needs to bepowered off, and the TMC11H housesBBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power


At a DBS3900 site, a DCDU-03C or DCDU-11Cin a TMC11H needs to be powered off, and theTMC11H houses BBU3900 and is suppliedwith -48 V DC power


Step 3 Remove the DCDU.1. Remove all cable connectors from the DCDU.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal

block from the DCDU, as shown in Figure 2-65.3. Record the connection of the input power cables, and then remove the power cables.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from both sides of the DCDU, and

pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as shown in Figure 2-66.




95

Figure 2-65 Removing the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block from theDCDU

Figure 2-66 Removing the DCDU

Step 4 Place the removed DCDU and protective covers in an ESD box or bag.

Step 5 Install a new DCDU-12B.




96

1. Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting earson both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.

2. Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).


----End

2.7.6 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC11H cabinetafter restructuring the TMC11H cabinet.








Description

Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe TMC11H

EPC4connector

LOAD9 porton theDCDU-12C

3V3connector

PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe TMC11H

The cable isnewlydelivered.

BBU powercable

EPC4connector

LOAD6 orLOAD7 porton theDCDU-12Cin theTMC11H

3V3connector

-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU ofthe TMC11H


EMUApower cable

EPC4connector


Cord endterminals

PWR1terminal onthe EMUA






97






Description

Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensor

Bare wire GATE porton the fanassembly


Reused


RJ45connector

COM_INport on thefan assembly

RJ45connector


The cable isnewlydelivered. Itis 1.1 m (3.61ft) long.

ELU signalcable

RJ45connector

ELU RJ45connector

ELU port onthe fanassembly

Reused

Monitoringsignaltransfercable for thefan in thefront door


Power cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor of theTMC11Hcabinet

4-pinconnector


Newlydeliveredcable


DB9 maleconnector

RS485 porton theEMUA

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on thefan assembly

Reused

Procedurel Install power cables in the TMC11H cabinet.

1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the TMC11H cabinet, as shown by P1in Figure 2-67.

a. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD9 porton the DCDU-12C.

b. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).

2. Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-67. If a BBU isnot installed in the cabinet, skip this step.


b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 orLOAD7 port on the DCDU-12C.




98

c. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on theUPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).


a. Replace the OT terminals at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4connector, as described in Table 2-10. For details about how to replace theterminals, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD8 porton the DCDU-12C.

c. Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 porton the EMUA.

Figure 2-67 Installing power cables in the TMC11H cabinet

4. Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then usecable ties to bind the cables.

5. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

l Install signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet.

1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to the GATEport on the fan assembly, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-68.

2. Optional: Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S2 inFigure 2-68. If a BBU is not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.








99


4. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly in the front door, as shown byS4 in Figure 2-68.



5. Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 2-68.


b. Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.

Figure 2-68 Installing signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet



----End

2.8 Restructuring the RFC CabinetThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFCcabinet to be restructured.

2.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFCThis section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the RFC.




100

Component Changes in the RFCFigure 2-69 shows component changes in the RFC.

Figure 2-69 Components in the RFC

No. Component

Change Type

Description

1 DCDU-01 To bereplaced

The DCDU-01 needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A toenhance the power distribution capability.

2 ELU To bereplaced


3 Door statussensor

Reused -


The FAN 01A needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C toenhance the heat dissipation capability.

5 RFU To bereplaced

The original RFUs are replaced by new RFUs withenhanced capacities.

6 DCDU-11A

To bereplaced

The DCDU-11A needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12Ato enhance the power distribution capability.




101

No. Component

Change Type

Description


The FAN 01B needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C toenhance the heat dissipation capability.

8 DCJunctionBox

- l The DC junction box in an RFC (Ver.B) uses one ortwo DC power inputs and provides two DC poweroutputs.

l The original DC junction box will be used in the RFC(Ver.C).

Cable Changes in the RFCFigure 2-70 shows the power cable changes in the RFC.

Figure 2-70 Power cables in the RFC




102

No.

Cable RFC (Ver.B) RFC (Ver.C) ChangeType



P0

DCDU-11Apowercable

- - Both ends areOTterminals.

l One endconnects to theRTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals on theDCDU-11A.

l The other endconnects to theDC junctionbox.

Reused

P1

Powercable forthe fanassemblyin theRFC

l One endis aparallelterminal.


l One endconnectsto theFAN porton theDCDU-01.

l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton the fanassemblyin theRFC.



l One endconnects to theLOAD6 port ontheDCDU-11A.

l The other endconnects to thePWR port onthe fanassembly in theRFC.

Tobereplaced




103

No.




P2toP7

RFUpowercables



l One endconnectsto one ofthe RFU0to RFU5ports ontheDCDU-01.

l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton anRRUamongRFU 0 toRFU 5.



l One endconnects to oneof the LOAD0to LOAD5ports on theDCDU-11A inthe RFC.

l The other endconnects to thePWR port on anRRU amongRFU 0 to RFU5.

Tobereplaced

P8








Reused

Figure 2-71 shows the signal cable changes in the RFC.




104

Figure 2-71 Signal cable changes in the RFC

No. Cable RFC (Ver.B) RFC (Ver.C) ChangeType



S1 MonitoringSignalCable forthe DoorStatusSensor

Both endsare barewires.

l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.



l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassemblyin theRFC.


Reused




105




S2 ELU signalcable


l One endconnectsto theELUport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.

l Theotherendconnectsto theELU.


l One endconnectsto theELU porton thefanassemblyin theRFC.

l Theother endconnectsto theELU.

Reused

S3 Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in theRFC


l Theotherend is atemperaturesensor.

l One endconnectsto theTEMport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.

l Theotherend isboundnearbythe airintakevent atthebottomof theRFC.



l One endconnectsto theTEMport onthe fanassemblyin theRFC.

l Theother endis boundnearbythe airintakevent atthebottomof theRFC.

Reused

2.8.2 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. Theprocedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C) is the same as the procedure forreplacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B).




106

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Procedure



Step 2 Power off the fan assembly.

If... Then...

An RFC (Ver.B)is used

Turn off the FAN circuit breaker on the DCDU-01.

An RFC (Ver.C)is used

Turn off the SW6 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11A.

Step 3 Remove the original fan assembly.1. Record all cable connections on the panel of the fan assembly.2. Remove all the cables from the front panel of the fan assembly.3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears on both sides

of the fan assembly, and pull the box out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 2-72.

NOTE

The procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B) is the same as the procedure for replacinga fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C). Figure 2-72 uses an RFC (Ver.C) as an example.




107


4. Place the removed fan assembly into an ESD box or bag.

Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four screws on the mounting ears on both sides to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).


----End



ContextThe ELU is on the inner right side of the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-73.




108


Procedure











109




NOTE








l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195


l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393


l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398


l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395




110










----End

2.8.4 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-01 or DCDU-11Ain an RFC.


ContextAs shown by Figure 2-77, a DCDU-01 is located in the top 1 U space of an RFC (Ver.B). TheDCDU-11A in an RFC (Ver.C) is in the same position as the DCDU-01.




111

Figure 2-77 Position of the DCDU-01

Procedure


NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESDgloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.

Step 2 Switch off all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU to power off the fan assembly and RFUs.

Step 3 Power off the DCDU.

If... Then...

An RFC (Ver.B)is installed in anAC powersupply scenario

Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPS.

An RFC (Ver.B)is installed in aDC powersupply scenario


An RFC (Ver.C)is installed in anAC powersupply scenario

Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPU.




112

If... Then...

An RFC (Ver.C)is installed in aDC powersupply scenario


Step 4 Remove the old DCDU.1. Record the positions of all connectors on the DCDU, and remove the connectors.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal



NOTE

The procedure for removing a DCDU-01 is the same as that for removing a DCDU-11A. Figure 2-78 and Figure2-79 use a DCDU-11A as an example.





113



Step 6 Install a new DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 2-81.1. Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 2-80.

Figure 2-80 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A

(1) Double-sided tape

2. Place the new DCDU-12A on the guide rails of the installation position and slide theDCDU-12A into the cabinet.

3. Tighten the two screws on each side of the DCDU-12A to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).




114

Figure 2-81 Installing the DCDU-12A

(1) DCDU-12A (2) Cable claw


----End

2.8.5 Replacing the RFUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the RFU.

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or a pairof ESD gloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.

Contextl RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU

V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, and LRFU.

l If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) is not faulty, disable its maximum output power lockingfor TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.

l Replacing an RFU interrupts services carried by the RFU.

l Replacing an RFU takes about 6 to 10 minutes.

l The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. WhenDRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced. For details abouthow to remove the GATM and Bias-Tee, see 2.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM andBias-Tee.

l A handle is used during the replacement. The handle is placed on the lower left side of thedocument holder on the cabinet door, as shown in Figure 2-82.




115

Figure 2-82 Position of the handle

NOTE

The handle is only for pulling an RFU outwards horizontally.

Procedure


NOTE

Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, to preventelectrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.

Step 2 Remove the RFU to be replaced.1. Turn off the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to power off the

RFU.2. Label the power cable for the RFU to be replaced, and disconnect the cable.3. Label the RF jumper for the RFU to be replaced, loosen the DIN 7/16 male elbow connector

on the RF jumper, and disconnect the RF jumper.4. Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the fiber.5. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws at the four corners of the RFU, and then

pull the RFU handle to move the RFU outwards 50 mm (1.97 in.) to 100 mm (3.94 in.), asshown in Figure 2-83. Hold the RFU with one hand, and remove the RFU from the cabinetwith the other hand.

CAUTIONThe RFU is heavy. Therefore, handle it with caution.

6. Place the handle in its original position.




116

Figure 2-83 Removing the RFU

Step 3 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC, as shown inFigure 2-84. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) isused, skip this step.

1. Strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton padding, and adhere the windproof cottonpadding to the position of "1" in Figure 2-84.

2. Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of theRFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure2-84, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.

3. Strip all pieces of windproof cotton padding left on the cabinet wall after removing thewindproof cotton padding.

Figure 2-84 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC

(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom rightside of the RFC

Step 4 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC, as shown in Figure2-85. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is used, skipthis step.




117


2. Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom left side of theRFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure2-85, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.


Figure 2-85 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC

(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottomleft side of the RFC

Step 5 Install the new RFU.

1. Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the rails until it snaps into place.

2. Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners of the RFU panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.) tosecure the RFU to the subrack.


----End

2.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction BoxThe DC junction box in an RFC converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.Skip this section if an RFC (Ver.C) is used, which has already been configured with a DC junctionbox.


Contextl In AC scenarios, the RFC power terminals in the EPU are connected to the DCDU-12A,

which then distributes DC power to the RFC, the DC junction box is not configured.




118

l In DC scenarios, the external power supply is directly connected to the DC junction box,which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.

Procedure



Step 2 Remove the DC junction box, as shown in Figure 2-86.1. Remove the screw from the protective cover for the DC junction box and then remove

protective cover.2. Remove the two screws from the DC junction box and then remove the DC junction box.

Figure 2-86 Removing the DC junction box

Step 3 Install the DC junction box in the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-87.1. Remove the two M6 screws from the left wall of the RFC.2. Align the two holes on the right side of the installation plate with the two holes left in Step

3.1, and secure them with the two removed M6 screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).3. Place the DC junction box on the installation plate, and secure them with two M4 screws

to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).




119

Figure 2-87 Installing the DC junction box

NOTE

It is recommended that the protective cover be reinstalled after all required cables are connected to the DCjunction box.

----End

2.8.7 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC cabinetafter you restructure the RFC.


ContextTable 2-13 describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.




120






Description

Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe RFC

EPC4connector

LOAD6 porton theDCDU-12A

3V3connector

PWR port onthe fanassembly inthe RFC


Input powercable fromthe DCjunction boxto theDCDU-12Ain the RFC

OT terminal(M6)

DC junctionbox in theRFC

OT terminals DCDU-12Ain the RFC

l A 0.3 m(0.98 ft)cablewith ablue wireand ablackwire isnewlydeliveredfor anRFC(Ver.B).

l Theoriginalcable isused in anRFC(Ver.C).Thenewlydeliveredcable canbedisposedof.




121





Description

RFU powercables

EPC4connector

One ofLOAD0 toLOAD5ports on theDCDU-12A

3V3connector

PWR port onone of RFU 0to RFU 5

Six RFUpower cablesare newlydelivered.Power cablesfor RFU 0 toRFU 2 are1.5 m (4.92ft) and powercables forRFU 3 toRFU 5 are1.1 m (3.61ft).







Description




Reused

ELU signalcable

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

ELU Reused

Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in theRFC

4-pinconnector

TEM port onthe fanassembly inthe RFC

Temperaturesensor

Air intakevent at thebottom of anRFC

Reused

Procedurel Install power cables in the RFC.

1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the RFC, as shown by P1 in Figure2-88.




122

a. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 porton the DCDU-12A.


2. Optional: Install the input power cable for the RFC (from the DC junction box to theDCDU-12A), as shown by P2 in Figure 2-88. If the cabinet is an RFC (Ver.B) in anAC power supply scenario, skip this step.

a. Optional: Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+)and NEG(-) terminals in the DC junction box on an inner wall of the RFC, andtighten the terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.). In an RFC (Ver.C), one end ofthe power cable has been connected to the DC junction box. Therefore, skip thisstep for an RFC (Ver.C).

b. Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN+ andNEG- terminals on the DCDU-12A, and tighten the terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48lbf·in.).

3. Install the RFU power cables, as shown by P3 to P8 in Figure 2-88.

a. Connect the end of the power cables with an EPC4 connector to one of theLOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12A.

b. Connect the end of the power cables with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe corresponding RFU, and tighten the screws on the connectors to 0.4 N·m(3.54 lbf·in.).

Figure 2-88 Installing power cables in the RFC




123



l Install signal cables in the RFC.



b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU porton the fan assembly in the RFC.

2. Connect one end of the door status monitoring signal cable with bare wires to theGATE port on the fan assembly, as shown by S2 in Figure 2-89.

3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the RFC, as shownby S3 in Figure 2-89.

a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the temperature sensor nearthe air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.

b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEM port on the fan assembly in the RFC.

Figure 2-89 Installing signal cables in the RFC





124


----End


2.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theIBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet

This section describes the changes to be made on the components and cables in an IBBS200Dor IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.

Component Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet

The component changes in the IBBS200D cabinet are the same as those in the IBBS200T cabinet.This section uses the IBBS200D as an example. Figure 2-90 shows component changes in theIBBS200D cabinet.

Figure 2-90 Components in the IBBS200D cabinet

No. Component

Change Type

Description

1 ELU To bereplaced


2 Storagebattery

Reused -




125

No. Component

Change Type

Description

3 Door statussensor

Reused -

4 Powerdistributionbox

To bereplaced

The power distribution box needs to be replaced toenhance the power backup capacity.

5 Junctionterminal forthe inputpowercable of theheatingfilm

Reused -

- Batterytemperature sensor

Reused -

Cable Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T CabinetFigure 2-91 shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the IBBS200T.

Figure 2-91 Equipotential cable and power cables in the battery cabinet




126

No.

Cable IBBS200D (Ver.B) orIBBS200T (Ver.B)

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T(Ver.C)

ChangeTypeConnector Installation

PositionConnector Installation

Position

P1

Powertransfercable forthe fan orTEC inthe frontdoor

l One endis a 3V3connector.

l The otherend is anOTterminal.

l One endconnectsto theCMUA.

l The otherendconnectsto thepowerdistribution box.



l One endconnects to thePWR port onthe CMUE.

l The other endconnects to thepowerdistributionbox.

Tobereplaced

P2

RTN(+)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries


l One endconnectsto thestoragebatteries.



l One endconnects to thestoragebatteries.


Tobereplaced

P3

NEG(-)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries







Tobereplaced




127

No.





Position

P4

RTN(+)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries







Tobereplaced

P5

NEG(-)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries







Tobereplaced

P6








Tobereused(replacement oftheterminalsnotrequired)




128

Figure 2-92 shows signal cable changes in the cabinet.

Figure 2-92 Signal cable changes in the battery cabinet

No. Cable IBBS200D (Ver.B) orIBBS200T (Ver.B)

IBBS200D (Ver.C) orIBBS200T (Ver.C)

ChangeType



S1 Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatussensor


l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theRFcabinet(RFC).





Reused




129



ChangeType



S2 ELU signalcable







Reused

2.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution BoxThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power distribution boxin the battery cabinet.


DANGERWhen replacing batteries, prevent short circuits or reverse connections between the positive andnegative poles of the storage batteries. All tools used for installation must be insulated to preventthe batteries from burning and to ensure personal safety.

ContextBefore replacing the power distribution box, remove all storage batteries from the cabinet.

Procedure





130


Step 2 Power off the battery cabinet.

If... Then...

An IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T(Ver.B) is used

1. Remove the tool-less female connector(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on theEPS.

2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker onthe EPS.

3. Turn off the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1circuit breakers on the power distributionbox.

4. Turn off the BAT circuit breaker on the EPS.

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C) 1. Remove the tool-less female connector(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on theEPU.

2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker onthe EPU.


4. Turn off the FAN/TEC_SW2 circuit breakeron the power distribution box.

Step 3 Remove the storage batteries.

1. Remove the terminal covers from the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 2-93.

Figure 2-93 Removing the terminal covers from the storage batteries




131

2. Use temporary labels to mark the input power cables for the positive and negative poles on

the storage batteries and the serial connection copper bars between the storage batteries,and remove the input power cables and copper bars, as shown in Figure 2-94.

Figure 2-94 Removing the power cables for storage batteries

3. Reinstall the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.4. Hold the slings on the storage batteries and pull the storage batteries out. Then use both

hands to remove the storage batteries at the same layer, and place the storage batteries ina safe position.

NOTE

l Remove the baffle plate and storage batteries layer by layer from top down. After removing thebaffle plate at one layer, you must remove all storage batteries at this layer before removing thebaffle plate at the lower layer.

l Use both hands to hold each storage battery to avoid falling.

l When placing the storage batteries outdoors, do not expose them to the sunlight.

Step 4 Remove the storage battery power cables and power transfer cable for the TEC or fan in thefront door from the power distribution box.

Step 5 Remove the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 2-95.1. Remove the two screws from the left cover plate of the power distribution box and remove

the cover plate.2. Remove the four screws from the interior of the power distribution box.




132

Figure 2-95 Removing the power distribution box

3. Take the power distribution box out and use insulation tape to wrap the OT terminals onthe cables connected to the power distribution box.

4. Place the power distribution box into an ESD box or bag.

Step 6 Install rubber protective caps onto the screws for the earthquake-proof support on the top of thebattery cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-96.

Figure 2-96 Installing rubber protective caps

(1) Screws for the earthquake-proof support (2) Rubber protective caps

Step 7 Install cables in the power distribution box.




133

1. Remove the cover plate from the new power distribution box.2. Install cables in the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 2-97.

Figure 2-97 Installing cables in the power distribution box

(1) NEG(-) cable for theupper storage batteries

(2) RTN(+) cable for theupper storage batteries

(3) NEG(-) cable for thelower storage batteries

(4) RTN(+) cable for thelower storage batteries

NOTE

The power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the battery cabinet has been connectedto the new power distribution box before delivery.

Step 8 Install the power distribution box in the battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-98.1. Place the new power distribution box in the battery cabinet.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the four M4x8 screws in the power distribution box

to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).3. Install the cover plate on the left side of the power distribution box and tighten the two

M3x6 screws on the cover plate to 0.55 N·m (4.87 lbf·in.).




134

Figure 2-98 Installing the power distribution box

----End


Prerequisitesl The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves,

a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

ContextThere is an ELU on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet, as shown inFigure 2-99.




135

Figure 2-99 Position of the ELU in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet

Procedure











136




NOTE








l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195


l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393


l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398


l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395




137










----End

2.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing storage batteries and cablesin the battery cabinet after you restructure the battery cabinet.






138






Remarks

Powertransfercable for theTEC or fan inthe frontdoor

3V3connector

PWR port onthe CMUEA

OT terminals(M4, 2.5mm2 or0.004 in.2)

PowerDistributionBox

Deliveredwith thepowerdistributionbox

RTN(+)cable for theupperstoragebatteries

OT terminal Storagebattery

OT terminal PowerDistributionBox


NEG(-)cable for theupperstoragebatteries




RTN(+)cable for thelowerstoragebatteries




NEG(-)cable for thelowerstoragebatteries










Remarks

ELU signalcable

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

ELU To be reused




139





Remarks


Bare wire GATE porton theCMUEA


To be reused

Procedurel Install storage batteries and power cables in the battery cabinet.

1. Install the power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the cabinet, asshown by P1 in Figure 2-103.

2. Place power cables for the storage batteries. The NEG(-) cables are black and RTN(+) cables are red. P2 and P3 in Figure 2-103 show the routing of these power cables.

Figure 2-103 Installing copper bars and power cables in the battery cabinet

3. Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown inFigure 2-104.

NOTE

The battery cell should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reservedbetween battery cells.




140

Figure 2-104 Installing the storage batteries

4. Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 2-105.

a. Remove terminal covers from the storage batteries.

b. Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for seriesconnections.

c. Install the NEG(-) cables and then RTN(+) cables for the storage batteries, andtighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).






141

6. Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.l Install signal cables in the battery cabinet.


a. Connect the ELU signal cable to the port on the ELU.b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU

port on the CMUEA.2. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure

2-106.

a. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the door status sensor.b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on the

CMUEA.

Figure 2-106 Installing signal cables in the battery cabinet



----End


2.10.1 Installing the BBU CaseThis section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in anAPM30H or TMC11H.




142

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, and a torque screwdriver.

ContextTwo BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the

BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.l When a second BBU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that the second BBU

be installed right above or below the original BBU without removing the guide rails.

Figure 2-107 shows the position for installing the BBU case in the APM30H and TMC11H.

Figure 2-107 Position for installing the BBU case

ProcedureStep 1 Optional: Remove the filler module from the position where the BBU case is to be installed, as

shown in Figure 2-108. If no filler module is installed in this position, skip this step.1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting ear on each

side of the filler module.2. Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.

NOTE

Install removed filler modules in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top to bottom. Redundantfiller modules can be discarded.

Figure 2-108 Removing the filler module




143

Step 2 Record the ESN on the BBU case and report it to the base station commissioning personnel. Fordetails, see Obtaining the ESN.

Step 3 Install cable claws on the BBU, as shown in Figure 2-109.1. Align the two cable claws with the holes on either side of the BBU case.2. Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw with a torque of 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 2-109 Installing cable claws on the BBU

Step 4 Install the BBU case, as shown in Figure 2-110.1. Place the BBU on the guide rails and slowly slide the BBU into the cabinet.2. Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ears on either side of the BBU to 2 N·m (17.70

lbf·in.).

Figure 2-110 Installing the BBU case

Step 5 Install the BBU power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-111.1. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructions

in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.




144

NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connectormust be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

2. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.

3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on theEPU in the APM30H.

CAUTIONWhen installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connectthe BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the EPU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.

NOTE

Figure 2-111 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30H. When the BBU case is installed in a TMC11H, thecable connections are the same.

Figure 2-111 Installing the BBU power cable in AC scenarios

Step 6 Install the BBU power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-112.

1. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructionsin Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.




145

NOTE



3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD8 port on theDCDU-12C in the TMC11H.

CAUTIONWhen installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connectthe BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.

NOTE

Figure 2-112 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC11H. When the BBU case is installed in an extensionTMC11H, the cable connections are the same.

Figure 2-112 Installing the BBU power cable in DC scenarios




146

Step 7 Install inter-BBU signal cables. For details, see 2.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU SignalCables.

Step 8 Install the transmission cables. For details, see 2.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables.

----End

2.10.2 Installing the BBU ComponentsThis section describes how to install the boards into the BBU and SLPU.

Context

NOTE

This chapter only describes the procedure for installing components in the BBU. For details about the slotswhere the BBU components are installed, see the BBU configuration information.

CAUTIONTake correct ESD prevention measures, such as wearing an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, toavoid static damage to boards, modules, and electronic components.

Operation Rulesl When moving a board, hold the board with both hands, as shown in Figure 2-113.

Figure 2-113 Incorrect and correct operations for moving a board

l When installing a board, hold the front panel with one hand and support the edge of the

board with the other hand to insert it into the slot. Do not use only one hand to hold theboard or apply pressure to the edge of the board. Figure 2-114 shows correct and incorrectoperations.




147

Figure 2-114 Incorrect and correct operations for supporting a board for installation

l When inserting a board into a slot, keep the board on the same plane as the slot. Do notbend the board or insert it at an angle. Figure 2-115 shows correct and incorrect operations.

Figure 2-115 Incorrect and correct operations for inserting a board

CAUTIONl Exercise cautions when holding and placing boards to avoid collision or scratches. Do not

stack or deform boards after they are unpacked.

l When inserting a board, ensure that it does not collide with the subrack and is properlyinstalled.

Installing the boards into the BBU

Figure 2-116 uses the WMPT and UPEU as examples to illustrate how to install boards in theBBU.




148

1. Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the fillerpanels from the slots.

2. If there are ejector levers on the panel, raise them.

3. Gently slide the board into the slot.

4. If there are ejector levers on the panel, close them.

5. Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

Figure 2-116 Installing the boards into the BBU

Installing the boards into the SLPU

Figure 2-117 uses the UELP as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the SLPU.




Figure 2-117 Installing the boards into the SLPU




149

2.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12BThis section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the DCDU-12B.


Context

When RFUs and RRUs are configured in the BTS3900A, a DCDU-12B must be installed in theRFC to supply power to RRUs.

Figure 2-118 shows the position of the DCDU-12B in the RFC.

Figure 2-118 Position of the DCDU-12B

Table 2-18 lists the specifications of DCDU-12B power cables in AC and DC scenarios.

Table 2-18 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables

Cable Color

Cross-SectionalArea ofthe Cable

One End The Other End

Connector


Connector


DCDU-12Binputpowercable(in AC

RTN(+)

Black

25 mm2 or0.039 in2,one group

OTterminal(M6)

RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals inthe INPUTpart of theDCDU-12B inthe RFC

OTterminal(M6)

RFC2terminal onthe EPU intheAPM30H




150

Cable Color



Connector


Connector


scenarios)

NEG(-)

Blue

DCDU-12Binputpowercable(in DCscenarios)

RTN(+)

Black

l 35mm2 or0.054in.2(lowsmokezerohalogen), onegroup

l 16mm2 or0.025in2, twogroups

OTterminal(M6)


Dependingon theexternalequipment

Externalpowerequipment

NEG(-)

Blue

Procedure

Step 1 Remove the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B.

Step 2 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 2-119.1. Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears

on the DCDU-12B contact the columns.2. Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as





151

Figure 2-119 Installing the DCDU-12B

(1) DCDU-12B (2) Cable claw

Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-120. Skip thisstep in DC scenarios.1. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For details, see Assembling the OT

Terminal and the Power Cable.2. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal RFC2

on the EPU in the APM30H.3. Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the

DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input wiringterminals on the DCDU-12B. Then reinstall the protective cover.




152

Figure 2-120 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in AC scenarios

Step 4 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-121.1. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For how to add a connector to the power

cable on the DCDU-12B side, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. Thetype of the connector at the other end depends on the onsite conditions.

2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cable to external power equipment.3. Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the





153

Figure 2-121 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in DC scenarios

Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cables.

Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.

----End


2.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.C)This section describes the changes of power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables,transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between cabinets duringthe upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).

Power Cables, PGND Cables, and Equipotential CablesTable 2-19 lists the changes of power cables, PGND cables, and equipotential cables.




154

Table 2-19 Changes of power cables, PGND cables, and Equipotential cables

Cable ChangeType

Before the Change After the Change

ConnectoratOneEnd


Connectorat theOtherEnd


ConnectoratOneEnd




Inputpowercablefor theAPM30H (inACscenarios)

To bereplaced (anewcableneedsto bepreparedonsite)

OTterminal(M6)

ACINPUT porton theEPU

Dependingon theexternalpowerequipment


OTterminal(M6)




Inputpowercablefor theTMC11H (inACscenarios)

To bereused, andtheconnector atoneendneedsto bereplacedonsite.

Tool-lessfemaleconnector(pressfit type)

TMCport ontheEPU

OTterminal(M6, 4mm2

or0.006in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-11C

EPC4connector

LOAD7 porton theEPU

OTterminal (M6,4 mm2

or0.006in.2)





155

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Powercablefor thejunction boxin theTMC11H

To bereused

OTterminal(M4,1.5mm2

or0.002in.2)

L3 andN3terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart onthejunction boxin theAPM30H


or0.002in.2)

L andNterminalsneartheACOUTPUTparton thejunctionbox intheTMC11H

OTterminal (M4,1.5mm2

or0.002in.2)



or0.002in.2)

L andNterminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart onthejunction boxin theTMC11H

Inputpowercablefor theTMC11H(whentheTMC11HusesDCpowersupplied bytheRFCcabinet)

To bereplaced

OTterminal(M6,25mm2

or0.039in.2)

Junction boxin theRFC

OTterminal(M6,25mm2

or0.039in.2)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal (M6,25mm2

or0.039in.2)





156

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Inputpowercablefor theRFC(in DCscenarios)

To bereplaced



OTterminal(M6)

Junctionbox intheRFC



OTterminal(M6)


Inputpowercablefor theRFC(in ACscenarios)

To bereplaced

Powerseries120connector(blue)

Powerseries120connector(blue)on theEPU

OTterminal

Junctionbox intheRFC

OTterminal(M6)

RFC1terminal ontheEPUin theAPM30H

OTterminal


RRUpowercable

To bereused(1)


One ofLOAD8 toLOAD13portson theEPU

Dependingon theRRUport

- EPC5orEPC4connector

One ofLOAD0 toLOAD8 portson theDCDU-12B


PWRport ontheRRU

Inputpowercablefor theheater(in ACscenarios)

To bereused


or0.002in.2)

L1 andN1terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart ontheEPU

C13connector

Heater/powerinputport


or0.002in.2)

L1 andN1terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart ontheEPU

C13connector





157

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Powercablesfor abatterycabinet


Powerseries120connector(grey)

Powerseries120connector(grey)on theEPU

OTterminal(M6,16mm2

or0.025in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalson theBATin thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200DorIBBS200T


or 0.05in.2)

BATterminal ontheEPUin theAPM30H


or 0.05in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminals ontheBATin thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T

Powercablesfor thefan inanIBBS200D



LOAD3 porton theEPUin theAPM30H


or0.004in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalson thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D

EPC4connector


EPC4connector

FAN/TEC_INPUTport onthepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D




158

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Powercablefor theheating filmin theIBBS200D

To bereused


or0.002in.2)

L1 andN1terminals orL2 andN2terminals onthejunction box


or0.002in.2)

L andNterminalson thejunctionboxfor theheating filmin theIBBS200D


or 0.05in.2)



or0.002in.2)

L andNterminals onthejunction boxfor theheating filmin theIBBS200D

Powercablefor theTECin theIBBS200T



LOAD3 porton theEPU


or0.004in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheFANsilkscreenon thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T

EPC4connector

LOAD8 porton theEPU

EPC4connector

FAN/TEC_INPUTport onthepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T

Equipotential cable

To bereused

OTterminal(M6)

Ground barin theuppercabinet

OTterminal(M6)

Ground barin thelowercabinet

OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)





159

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




PGNDcable

To bereused

OTterminal(M6)

Ground barfor thecabinet

OTterminal(M6)

Groundbusbaroutside thecabinet

OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


NOTE

(1) The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length requirementsof the new RRU.

Signal CablesTable 2-20 lists the signal cable changes.

Table 2-20 Signal cable changes

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




MonitoringsignalcablebetweencascadedCMUEAs

Tobereused

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport ontheupper-levelCMUA

RJ45connector

COM_INport onthelower-levelCMUA

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport ontheupper-levelCMUEA

RJ45connector

COM_INport onthelower-levelCMUEA




160

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Monitoringsignalcablefor abatterycabinet

Tobereused

RJ45connector

COM_INport ontheCMUA intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T

RJ45connector

COM_485port onthePMU

RJ45connector

COM_INport ontheCMUEA intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T

RJ45connector





161

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignalcable

Tobereused

RJ45connector

l COM_INport ontheCMUAintheRFC

l COM_INport ontheCMUAintheAPM30H

RJ45connector

l MON0port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheAPM30H


RJ45connector

l COM_INport ontheCMUEAintheRFC

l COM_INport ontheCMUEAintheAPM30H

RJ45connector

l MON0port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheRFC





162

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




BBUinterconnectioncable

Tobereused

DLCconnector

One ofthe M0to M4portson theUCIUin theBBU

DLCconnector

l CIport ontheUMPTintheBBU

l S0port ontheUCIUintheBBU

DLCconnector


DLCconnector



BBUalarmcable

Tobereused

RJ45connector

EXT_ALM0orEXT_ALM1port ontheUPEUorUEIUin theBBU

RJ45connector

Externalalarmdevice

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

Externalalarmdevice

Cablebetweentwocombined basestations

Tobereused

DB15maleconnector

GCKport ontheUCIUin theBBU

MD36orDB15maleconnector

DGLUb ontheDCTB

DB15maleconnector



DGLUb ontheDCTB




163

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




External drycontactmonitoringsignalcable

Tobereused

Barewire

SLPU Dependingon theexternaltransmissionequipment

Externaltransmissionequipment

Barewire



Adapterused forlocalmaintenance

Tobereused

USB3.0connector

USBport ontheUMPTin theBBU

Ethernetconnector

Ethernetcable

USB3.0connector


Ethernetconnector

Ethernetcable

Transmission Cables and CPRI Electrical CablesTable 2-21 lists the changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables.

Table 2-21 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End


Connector atthe Other End


E1/T1cable

To bereused

DB26 maleconnector

OUTSIDE porton the UELP inthe SLPU

Depending onthe externaltransmissionequipment


FE/GEEthernet cables

To bereused

RJ45 connector FE electricalport in theOUTSIDE parton the UFLP inthe SLPU

RJ45 connector Router that isconnected tothe BSC




164

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End




FE/GEfiberopticcable

To bereused

LC connector l FE opticalport on theGTMU,WMPT,UMPT, orUTRP inthe BBU

l FE opticalport on theLMPT orUMPT inthe BBU

l FCconnector

l SCconnector

l LCconnector

Router that isconnected tothe BSC

E1/T1surgeprotectiontransfercable

To bereused

DB25connector

INSIDE porton the UELP inthe SLPU

DB26connector

E1/T1 port onthe GTMU,WMPT,UMPT, orUTRP in theBBU

FE/GEsurgeprotectiontransfercable

To bereused

RJ45 connector l FEelectricalport on theGTMU,WMPT, orUMPT inthe BBU

l FEelectricalport on theLMPT orUMPT inthe BBU

RJ45 connector FE electricalport in theINSIDE part onthe UFLP in theSLPU

Interconnection cablebetween FEopticalports

To bereused

LC connector FE optical porton the GTMU,WMPT/UMPT, orLMPT/UMPTin the BBU

LC connector FE optical porton the WMPT/UMPT, LMPT/UMPT, orGTMU in theBBU




165

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End




Interconnection cablebetween FEelectrical ports

To bereused

RJ45 connector FE electricalport on theGTMU,WMPT/UMPT, orLMPT/UMPTin the BBU

RJ45 connector FE electricalport on theWMPT/UMPT,LMPT/UMPT,or GTMU in theBBU

CPRIelectricalcables

To bereused

SFP20 maleconnector

l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5ports on theGTMU inthe BBU

l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5 (orCPRI0 toCPRI2)ports on theWBBP inthe BBU

l One of theCPRI0 toCPRI5ports on theLBBP in theBBU

SFP20 maleconnector

l CPRI0 orCPRI1 porton one ofMRFU 0 toMRFU 5

l CPRI0 porton one ofGRFU 0 toGRFU 5

l CPRI0 porton one ofWRFU 0 toWRFU 5

l CPRI0 porton one ofLRFU 0 toLRFU 5

RF CablesTable 2-22 lists the RF cable changes.

Table 2-22 RF cable changes

Cable ChangeType

Connectorat One End




RF jumper To be reused DIN straightmaleconnector

Antennafeeder

DIN elbowmaleconnector

ANT_TX/RXA andANT_RXBports on theRFU




166

Cable ChangeType

Connectorat One End




Inter-RFURF signalcable

To be reused QMA elbowmaleconnector

RX_OUTAport on theRFU

QMA elbowmaleconnector

RX_INBport on anRFU

2.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC CabinetsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for variouscabinets when AC power is supplied.

Installing Input Power Cable for the APM30HThe input power cable for the APM30H connects the external power equipment to the inputwiring terminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the cabinets in the BTS3900A.

Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable

cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.l The PGND cable is installed.

Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are

purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.

– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

The cabinets used by the BTS3900A in AC scenarios support the power supplies of 220 V ACthree-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire. Table 2-23 lists the inputpower cables that are delivered for the APM30H supplied with different type of power.

Table 2-23 Specifications of input power cables for the APM30H

Cable Color One End The OtherEnd

Remarks

Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V AC three-phase power

L1wire

Brown OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)


l Preparedonsite

l Black cablewith dualinsulation




167


Remarks

L2wire

layers andfour corewires

Black OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)


L3wire

Gray OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)


Nwire

Blue OT terminal (M6,6 mm2 or 0.009 in.2)


Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V ACsingle-phasepower

L wire Brown OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)


l Preparedonsite

l Two wires (Land N), eachwith a singlecore and twoinsulationlayers

Nwire

Blue OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)


Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with110 V AC dual-live-wire power

L1wire

Black OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)


l Preparedonsite

l Three wires(L1, L2, andN), each witha single coreand twoinsulationlayers

L2wire

Red OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)


Nwire

White OT terminal (M6,25 mm2 or 0.039in.2)


Procedure

Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the APM30H.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add an OT terminal to each end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling

the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the APM30H, as shown in Figure 2-122, Figure 2-123, orFigure 2-124.




168

1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover for the ACinput terminals, and open the protective cover.

2. Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting barfrom the L1, L2, and L3 terminals.

NOTE

When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110 V ACdual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.

3. Route the power cable into the cabinet along the left side, connect each wire to thecorresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48lbf·in.).

4. Reinstall the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screw on the protectivecover to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).

Figure 2-122 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V ACthree-phase)

(1) Short-circuiting bar




169

Figure 2-123 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V ACsingle-phase)




170

Figure 2-124 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (110 V ACdual-live-wire)

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.

Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cableoutlet on the cabinet.

Step 5 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H

The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H include the input power cable for theTMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed powerfrom the APM30H into the TMC11H and other equipment. You need to reuse the power cablesfrom the APM30H to the TMC11H with replacing the connectors at both ends.


cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

l The PGND cable is installed.




171

Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables arepurchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:



Table 2-24 lists the specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H.

Table 2-24 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H

Cable Color One End The Other End Remarks

Input powercable for theTMC11H

RTN(+)wire

Black EPC4 connector OT terminal(M6, 4 mm2 or0.006 in.2)

To be reused, andthe connectors atboth ends need tobe replaced.

NEG(-)wire

Blue EPC4 connector OT terminal(M6, 4 mm2 or0.006 in.2)

Power cablefor thejunction boxin theTMC11H

L wire Brown

OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002in.2)

OT terminal(M4, 1.5 mm2 or0.002 in.2)

To be reused

N wire Blue OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002in.2)


Procedure

Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in theTMC11H.

1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

2. Add a connector to each end of the input power cable for the TMC11H and the power cablefor the junction box in the TMC11H according to the instructions in Table 1. For details,see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connectorand the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-125.

1. Remove the protective cover from the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.

2. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminalLOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30H.

3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminalsto 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).




172

4. Reinstall the protective cover onto the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.

Figure 2-125 Installing the input power cable for the TMC11H

Step 3 Install the power cable for the junction box of the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-126.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L3 and N3 terminals in the junction

box of the APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the AC input terminals L and N in the junction

box of the TMC11H.




173

Figure 2-126 Installing power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H




----End

Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the RFCsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from theAPM30H to the RFCs.






174





Table 2-25 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs.

Table 2-25 Power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs


Remarks

Input powercable for theRFC(between theAPM30Hand the RFCright belowtheAPM30H)

RTN(+)wire

Black OT terminal (M6, 25mm2 or 0.039 in.2)

OT terminal(M6, 25 mm2 or0.039 in.2)

A cable is newlydelivered.

NEG(-)wire

Blue

Input powercable for theRFC(between theAPM30Hand the RFCon the lowerright side)

RTN(+)wire



A cable is newlydelivered.

NEG(-)wire

Blue

Procedure

Step 1 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower side),as shown in Figure 2-127.

1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC1 terminals on the EPUin the APM30H.

2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the DC junction box inthe RFC on the lower side.




175

Figure 2-127 Installing input power cables for the RFC

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower rightside), as shown in Figure 2-128.


2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the DC junction box inthe RFC on the lower right side.




176

Figure 2-128 Installing the input power cable for the RFC




----End

Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (OneIBBS200D or IBBS200T Configured)

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from theAPM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T when one IBBS200D or IBBS200T is configured inthe initial configuration.




177





– The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

l A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Table 2-26 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Table 2-26 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T


Remarks

Power cablesfor the fan inanIBBS200D

RTN(+)wire

Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector Prepared onsite

NEG(-)wire

Blue

Power cablefor the TECin theIBBS200T

RTN(+)wire


NEG(-)wire

Blue

Power cablefor a batterycabinet

RTN(+)wire

Red OT terminal (M8, 35mm2 or 0.05 in.2)


Prepared onsite

NEG(-)wire

Black

Power cablefor theheating filmin theIBBS200D

L wire Brown

OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.2)


To be reused

Nwire

Blue




178

Procedure

Step 1 Prepare the cable.

1. Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS200D or IBBS200T) to be configured anddetermine the cable to be prepared and installed according to Table 1.


3. Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:

l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable

l Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable

Step 2 Install the power cable for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 2-129.

1. Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreenon the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Figure 2-129 Installing the power cable for the battery cabinet

Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 2-130.

NOTE

If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.




179

1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 onthe right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.

Figure 2-130 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly in the IBBS200D

Step 4 Install the power cable for the heating film in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 2-131.

NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.

1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L2 and N2 terminals in the junctionbox on the inner left wall of the APM30H.

2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D.




180

Figure 2-131 Installing the power cables for the heating films in the IBBS200Ds

NOTICEWhen installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do notconnect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 2-132.

l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.

l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from thetop, not from the bottom.

Figure 2-132 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes ofthe IBBS200Ds




181

Step 5 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 2-133.

NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.



Figure 2-133 Installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T

Step 6 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cable.

NOTE

When routing cables along the right side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cablesthat are routed in front of the power distribution box. For easy maintenance in the future, do not bind the cablesthat are routed in front of the power distribution box.





182


----End

Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts(Two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts Configured)

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from theAPM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts when two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts are configuredin the initial configuration.










Table 2-27 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.

Table 2-27 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts


Remarks

Power cablefor the fanassembly intheIBBS200D

RTN(+)wire


NEG(-)wire

Blue

Cascadingpower cablefor the fanassembly intheIBBS200D

RTN(+)wire

Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector The power cableis reused withconnectors atboth endreplaced.NEG

(-)wire

Blue




183


Remarks


RTN(+)wire


NEG(-)wire

Blue

Cascadingpower cablefor the TECin theIBBS200T

RTN(+)wire


(-)wire

Blue

Power cablefor batteries

RTN(+)wire



Prepared onsite

NEG(-)wire

Black

Cascadingpower cablefor thebatteries

RTN(+)wire



Prepared onsite

NEG(-)wire

Black

Power cable(two wires)for theheating filmin theIBBS200D

L wire Brown



To be reused

Nwire

Blue

Procedure









184


Step 2 Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P1 in Figure 2-134.1. Connect the OT terminal (M8) at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen

on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals near the BAT silkscreen in the lower part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Step 3 Install cascading power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-134.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring

terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the upper part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)wiring terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution boxin the upper IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Figure 2-134 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the storage batteries

Step 4 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure 2-135.

NOTE





185


2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen on the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

Step 5 Install the cascading power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure2-135.

NOTE


1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.

Figure 2-135 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the fan in theIBBS200D

Step 6 Install the power cable for the heating film in the upper IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure2-136.

NOTE





186


2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the upper IBBS200D.

Step 7 Install the power cable for the heating film in the lower IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure2-136.

NOTE



2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the lower IBBS200D.





187

NOTICEWhen installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do notconnect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 2-137.l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from the

top, not from the bottom.


Step 8 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P1 in Figure 5.

NOTE



2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the FAN/TEC port near theINPUT silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

Step 9 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-138.

NOTE







188

Figure 2-138 Installing the power cable and cascading power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T


NOTE




----End

(Optional) Installing the RRU Power CableWhen the BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRUs are powered by theDCDU-12B in the RFC.




189




Contextl The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length

requirements of the new RRU.

l The colors and structures of the power cables are for reference only, which may differ fromthose of the cables onsite.




l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of theRRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installationguide.

l Table 2-28 lists the specifications of RRU power cables when a DCDU-12B suppliespower.

Table 2-28 Specifications of the RRU power cable


RRUpowercable

RTN(+)

Black EPC5 or EPC4connector

Depending onthe RRU port

l If theoriginalRRU powercable can bereused, youneed toreplace theconnector ontheDCDU-12Bside.

l If theoriginalRRU powercable mustbe replaced,you need toadd newconnectorsto both endsof the newRRU powercable onsite.

NEG(-)

Blue




190

Procedure

Step 1 Route the RRU power cable into the cabinet through the cable hole.

Step 2 Remove the ground clip in the cabinet, and put the removed ground clip into the ESD bag orbox.

Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 2-139.1. Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away

from the cable bag in the RFC to expose the shield layer.2. Strip the shield layer to expose the two core wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away

from the cable bag in the RFC.3. Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely

contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m(10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 2-139 Installing the ground clip

4. Install the PGND cables with the ground clips onto the two self-clinching studs on the right

wall of the RFC. Then tighten the self-clinching studs to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Step 4 Add an EPC5 or EPC4 connector to the RRU power cable on the DCDU-12B side. For detailsabout how to add the connector, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable orAssembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

Step 5 Stick a temporary label onto the RRU power cable to be installed.

Step 6 Connect the one end of the cable to the RRU.

Step 7 Connect the EPC5 or EPC4 connector on the RRU power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD8ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 2-140.




191

CAUTIONWhen installing the RRU power cable for an RRU that is added to a running base station, connectthe RRU power cable first to the RRU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.

Figure 2-140 Installing the RRU power cable



Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

2.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC ScenariosThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for variouscabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.




192

Installing Input Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theRFC and TMC11H when -48 V DC power is supplied.









As listed in Table 2-29, power cables for the RFC have two specifications: 35 mm2 (0.05 in.2)and 16 mm2 (0.02 in.2).

Table 2-29 Input power cables for the RFC


Remarks

Input powercable for theRFC

(35 mm2 or0.05 in.2, onegroup)

RTN(+)wire


Depending onthe externalequipment

The powercable is madeonsite.

NEG(-) wire

Blue


(16 mm2 or0.02 in.2, twogroups)

RTN(+)wire


NEG(-) wire

Blue

Input powercable for theTMC11H(theTMC11H ispowered bythe RFC)

RTN(+)wire




NEG(-) wire

Blue




193

Procedure

Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the RFC.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cable for the RFC according to Table 1.

For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-141.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals

in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the external power supply.


Step 3 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-142.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals

in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the input power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG

(-) terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.




194





----End







195

Contextl The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which

may differ from those of the cables onsite.





l Table 2-30 lists the specifications of the RRU power cable when a DCDU-12B suppliespower.



RRUpowercable

RTN(+)





NEG(-)

Blue

NOTE

If the RRU is to be placed at a longer distance, replace the original RRU power cable with a longerone.

Procedure

Step 1 Route an RRU power cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.




196





contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

NOTE

When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules:

l When one to three RRU power cables are installed, put all the RRU power cables on one side of theground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-143.

l When four or six RRU power cables are installed, put two or three RRU power cables on each side ofthe ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-143.

l When five RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread three cablesthrough one ground clip and two cables through the other group clip, or thread four cables throughone ground clip or one cable through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 3 in Figure2-143.

l When seven to ten RRU power cables or twelve RRU power cables are installed, use two ground clipsand comply with the preceding rules.

l When eleven RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread fivecables through one ground clip and six cables through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration4 in Figure 2-143.

Figure 2-143 Installing the ground clips (side elevation view)




197

Figure 2-144 Installing the ground clips









198





----End

2.11.4 Installing Transmission CablesThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing transmission cables betweena cabinet and the external transmission equipment.

Installing the E1/T1 CableThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the E1/T1 cable.

Contextl Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the

E1/T1 cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in the APM30Hthat is shown in Figure 2-146.




199

Procedure

Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on the UELP, as shown in Figure2-146.

NOTE

For the details about the cable connections,

l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)Hardware Description.

l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base StationCables.

Figure 2-146 Installing the E1/T1 cable

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable outlet on the bottom left side of thecabinet.



----End

Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable.






200

– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l An FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable.l When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the

FE/GE Ethernet cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing inthe APM30H that is shown in Figure 2-148.

Procedure

Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.

Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE cable in a proper position within 1 m from the cable outletof the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-147.1. Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE cable, and strip the sheath off the cable

for about 40 mm to expose the shield layer.2. Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.3. Make the shield layer of the FE/GE cable in full contact with the ground clip, and tighten

the M4 screws on the clip until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 N·m.

Figure 2-147 Installing a grounding clip

Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) portnear the OUTSIDE label on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 2-148.




201

NOTE




Figure 2-148 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable

Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.



----End

Installing the FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable.







202

l Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeledas MM.

l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multi-mode opticalmodule is black or gray.

l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.

l An FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SCconnector, or LC connector at the other end.

l SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are notused simultaneously.

l SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they arenot used simultaneously.

l The method of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H is the same as the methodof installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in a TMC11H. The following describes the procedurefor installing an FE/GE fiber optic cable in an APM30H.

NOTICEAn optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore,you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes.

Procedure

Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 2-149.

1. Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the correspondingBBU board.

2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.

3. Lower the puller on the optical module.

4. Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.

5. Raise the puller on the optical module.

Figure 2-149 Installing the optical module




203

Step 2 Insert the optical module into the corresponding FE/GE optical port, as shown in Figure2-150.

NOTE




Step 3 Stick a temporary label to the FE/GE fiber optic cable to be installed.

Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in Figure2-150.

Figure 2-150 Installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable

Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.


Step 7 Replace the temporary label on the FE/GE fiber optic cable with an engineering label. Fordetailed operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

2.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in ACScenarios

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cablesbetween cabinets when AC power is supplied.




204

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H.

Contextl When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added

into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 2-31 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable changes.

Table 2-31 Specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 APM30H

Cable One End The Other End Remarks



CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30H)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the RFC

RJ45connector

MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theAPM30H

To be reused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 2-151.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of

the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the

APM30H.




205

Figure 2-151 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200TThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.



l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 2-32 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cables between twocabinets after the cable changes.




206

Table 2-32 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Batterycabinetmonitoringsignal cable(between theIBBS200DorIBBS200TandAPM30H)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA intheIBBS200DorIBBS200T

RJ45connector

COM_485port on thePMU in theAPM30H

To be reused

Procedure



APM30H.




207


Step 2 Install a battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T andAPM30H), as shown in Figure 2-153.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the

IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.




208

Figure 2-153 Installing the battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200Dor IBBS200T and APM30H)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.







209

Table 2-33 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC11Hand RFC)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe TMC11H

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe RFC

To be reused

Procedure



APM30H.




210


Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),as shown in Figure 2-155.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of

the TMC11H.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan

assembly of the RFC.




211

Figure 2-155 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC11H and RFC)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H.



l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 2-34 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable change.




212

Table 2-34 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H




CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable

RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablefor a batterycabinet

RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure



APM30H.




213


Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T andAPM30H), as shown in Figure 2-157.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the





214

Figure 2-157 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet







215

Figure 2-158 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC11H and RFC)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.







216

Table 2-35 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theupperIBBS200D/IBBS200Tand lowerIBBS200D/IBBS200T)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe upperIBBS200D

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe lowerIBBS200D

To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablefor a batterycabinet(between theAPM30Hand lowerbatterycabinet)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe lowerIBBS200DorIBBS200T

RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure



APM30H.




217


Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T), as shown in Figure 2-160.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the upper

IBBS200D or IBBS200T.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA on the door of

the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.




218

Figure 2-160 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between theupper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery cabinet and theAPM30H), as shown in Figure 2-161.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the lower





219

Figure 2-161 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower batterycabinet and the APM30H)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.







220

Table 2-36 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 2-162.




221

1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly ofthe RFC.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of theAPM30H.








222

Figure 2-163 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)






223

Figure 2-164 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lowerbattery cabinet and the APM30H)







224



----End

2.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48V DC Scenarios

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cablesbetween cabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H.







225

Table 2-37 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 TMC11H




CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(betweenthe RFC andTMC11H)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on thefanassembly inthe RFC

RJ45connector

MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU of theTMC11H

To bereused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown inFigure 2-166.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of


TMC11H.




226

Figure 2-166 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC11H)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs.

ContextMonitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of thecabinet. Table 2-38 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinetsafter the cable change.




227

Table 2-38 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs




CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andTMC11H)

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theTMC11H

To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theextensionTMC11Hand RFC)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe extensionTMC11H

RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure



TMC11H.




228


Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the extension TMC11Hand RFC), as shown in Figure 2-168.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly

of the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly

of the extension TMC11H.




229

Figure 2-168 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe extension TMC11H and RFC)


----End

Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.







230

Table 2-39 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenarioof 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs

Cable One End The Other End ChangeType




RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To bereused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweentheextensionTMC11Hand RFC)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA intheextensionTMC11H

RJ45connector


To bereused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweentwo RFCs)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe rightRFC

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe left RFC

To bereused

Procedure



TMC11H.




231



of the right RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly





232

Figure 2-170 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe extension TMC11H and RFC)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between two RFCs), as shownin Figure 2-171.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly

of the left RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly

of the right RFC.




233

Figure 2-171 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweentwo RFCs)


----End

2.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal CablesThis section describes the procedure for installing inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or single-mode base station.

Prerequisitesl The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.

l The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.

l The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable.

Optical modules can be divided into single- and multimode optical modules, which can bedistinguished as follows:

l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode opticalmodule is black or gray.

l The transmission mode is displayed as "SM" on the label of a single-mode optical moduleand "MM" on the label of a multimode optical module.

There is a label on each optical module, which provides information such as the rate, wavelength,and transmission mode, as shown in the following figure.




234

Figure 2-172 Label on an optical module

(1) Rate (2) Wavelength (3) Transmission mode

ContextThe following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBUsignal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU SignalCable Connections.

Table 2-40 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected

InterconnectionMode


BBU 0 BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT M0 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_U

M1 port on the UCIU CI port on the UMPT_L

HEI port on the WBBPf HEI port on the WBBPf

NOTE

BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.

NOTICEThe performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20minutes.

The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBUsignal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU SignalCable Connections.




235


InterconnectionMode


BBU 0 BBU 1




UMPT+UMPT CI port on the UMPT CI port on the UMPT

NOTICEA color-coding tape marked Master is attached to one end of an inter-BBU cable that connectstwo UMPTs in different BBUs. When installing the cable, connect the end marked Master tothe CI port on the UMPT in BBU 0 and the other end to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 1.

NOTE



Procedure

Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the opticalmodules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.1. Lower the puller of the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the port.3. Raise the puller of the optical module.





236

Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 2-174.

Figure 2-174 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable

Step 3 Install one or two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT. The followingfigure shows the installation of two inter-BBU signal cables.

NOTE

l You need to install two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+UL mode.

l You need to install only one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+L or GL+Umode.

1. Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0.2. Connect the other end of the cables to the CI ports on the UMPT_U and UMPT_L in BBU

1.

Step 4 Install one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the WBBPf to the WBBPf, as shown in thefollowing figure. The inter-BBU signal cable is installed only to interconnect the WBBPf in aBBU to the WBBPf in another BBU.1. Connect one end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 0.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1.

NOTE

l When two BBUs are installed in the APM30H, connect the signal cables, as shown in Figure 2-175. WhenBBU 0 is installed in the APM30H and BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H, connect the signal cables, asshown in Figure 2-176.

l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the sametype as those on BBU 0.

l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1Aand 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1.

l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.




237

Figure 2-175 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (1)




238


Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic patchcord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBUinterconnection signal cable before using cable ties to secure it. If another type of cable is usedas a BBU interconnection signal cable, directly use cable ties to secure it.


----End

2.11.8 Installing the RF JumperThe RF jumper transmits signals between the RFU and antenna system.

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a cable cutter, PVC insulation tape, and an open-end wrench or torque wrench.

Procedure

Step 1 Route the RF jumper into the cabinet through the cable outlet in the cabinet according to one ofthe manners shown in Figure 2-177. Lay out the installed RF jumper according to the instructionsin Cabling Requirements.




239

Figure 2-177 Routing of the RF jumper

Step 2 Install the RF jumper, as shown in Figure 2-179 and Figure 2-178.

NOTICEConnect each RF jumper securely to prevent RF signal leakage.

Figure 2-178 Installing RF jumpers for interconnected RFUs

NOTE

Inter-RFU RF signal cables have been installed in the cabinet before delivery. You only need to check whetherthe cables are securely connected.




240

Figure 2-179 Installing RF jumpers for independent RFUs

1. Connect the DIN connector on the RF jumper to the ANT port on the RFU panel.2. Use a 32 mm (1.26 in.) open-end wrench or torque wrench to tighten the two DIN

connectors from bottom to top. Ensure that the tightening torque reaches 25 N·m to 35 N·m(221.27 lbf·in. to 309.78 lbf·in.).

Figure 2-180 Tightening the DIN connectors

Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumper according to the instructions in Attaching the Color Ring.

Step 4 Connect the DIN straight male connector at the other end of the jumper to the connector on thefeeder.

----End

2.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical CableThe CPRI electrical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RFU.




241

Procedure

Step 1 Insert the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables into the CPRI ports on thecorresponding board in the BBU.

NOTE


l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D) HardwareDescription.

l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station Cables.

l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing CPRI Cables.

Step 2 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cable through the cable hole on the inner left side ofthe power cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the correspondingRFU, as shown in Figure 2-181.

Figure 2-181 Installing the CPRI electrical cable

Step 3 Connect the SFP connector on the CPRI electrical cable to the CPRI0 port on the panel of theRFU, as shown in Figure 2-181.

Step 4 Route the cables by referring to Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind the cables.

NOTE

l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cable at the top of the DCDU-12A in the RFC or in thebase of the RFC.

l Lay out the cable according to the manners in Figure 2-181. Ensure that the cable is routed to the RFUthrough the cable bridge above the RFUs.




242

Step 5 Attach labels to the installed cables. For details, see Attaching an L-Shaped Label.

----End

2.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic CableThe CPRI fiber optic cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RRU.

Contextl Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeled

as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multi-mode optical

module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.l For details about the connections of CPRI fiber optic cables, see "CPRI Cable Connections"

in the BTS900A Hardware Description.

NOTICEThe performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes maybe abnormal. Therefore, you must insert an fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical modulewithin 20 minutes.

For the details about the cable connections,l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)

Hardware Description.l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base

Station Cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 2-182.1. Lower the puller on the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU/WBBP/LBBP. Then insert an

optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU.

NOTE

Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.





243


Step 2 Install a CPRI fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 2-183.1. Stick a temporary label to the CPRI fiber optic cable to be installed.2. Remove the dustproof cap from the connector on the fiber optic cable.3. Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into

the optical modules in the WBBPLBBPGTMU, WBBP, or LBBPGTMU or WBBP, andthen insert the DLC connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical modulein the RF module.

NOTICEl When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the break-out fiber optic

cables on the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.03 m (1.18in.), respectively.

l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX port on the BBU must be connected to theTX port on the RF module, and the RX port on the BBU must be connected to the RXport on the RF module.

Figure 2-183 Installing the CPRI fiber optic cable

Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cable along the left of the cabinet, and then lead it out of the cabinetfrom the cable hole on the left of the bottom. For details, see Cabling Requirements.




244

Step 4 Replace the temporary label on the CPRI fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End


Cabinet Installation ChecklistTable 2-42 describes the cabinet installation checklist.

Table 2-42 Cabinet installation checklist

No. Item

1 The installation position of the cabinet strictly complies with the engineeringdesign.

2 The base is securely installed.

3 All the bolts, including those for electrical connections, are tightened. The springwashers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.

4 The cabinet is neat and clean.

5 The paint on the surface is satisfactory. The damaged paint is repaired. For details,see 2.14.3 Repainting.

6 Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.

Installation Environment ChecklistTable 2-43 describes the installation environment checklist.

Table 2-43 Installation environment checklist

No. Item

1 No excessive straps or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.

2 No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around the cabinet.

3 Antirust powder on the door of the cabinet is cleared.

Electrical Connection ChecklistTable 2-44 describes the electrical connection checklist.




245

Table 2-44 Electrical connection checklist

No. Item

1 All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters. Thereshould not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed.

2 The PGND cable is securely connected and the AC input power cable and cablesin the cabinet are correctly connected according to the electrical design of the powersystem. The screws are tightened. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not short-circuited.

3 The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off rather than coiled.

4 The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are securely solderedor crimped.

5 The bare wires and the terminal handles at the wiring terminals are coated with heatshrink tubing.

6 The flat washer and the spring washer are well mounted on all OT terminals.

7 The exterior of the battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.

8 The shell of the battery is clean without any leakage trace.

9 The wiring post on the battery stands properly without any damage, and the post isnot covered with any acid substances.

10 The pressure relief valve of the battery is not deformed, and no liquid leaks.

11 The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positiveand negative poles.

12 The voltage of the battery is normal.l The voltage of a 2 V battery cell ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.l The voltage of a 12 V battery cell ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.l The total voltage of the batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.

13 The circuit breakers for the batteries are set to OFF.

Cable Installation ChecklistTable 2-45 describes the cable installation checklist.

Table 2-45 Cable installation checklist

No. Item

1 All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are securelyconnected. All cable connectors at the bottom of the cabinet are securely installed.




246

No. Item

2 The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and facethe same direction.

3 Different types of power cables are bound separately when being routed, forexample, the power cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber optic cables, and E1/T1/FE cables.

4 The layout of all cables facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion. Forexample, the maintenance transfer cable is bound to the outside of the BBU cableclaw, as shown in Figure 2-184.

5 Legible labels are attached to both ends of all cables.

6 The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are smoothwithout sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.2 in.) of theoutdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.

7 The port that no cable is connected to is properly protected.

8 The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid false connection that will causean abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).

Figure 2-184 Checking the maintenance transfer cable

Checklist for the Hardware UpgradeTable 2-46 describes the checklist for the hardware upgrade.




247

Table 2-46 Checklist for the hardware upgrade

No.

Cabinet Type Item

1 APM30H/TMC11H

The ground cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 2.6.5 Replacing the Power System.

2 APM30H/TMC11H

The vacant customer space in the cabinet has been configured withthe filler module.

3 APM30H/TMC11H

The ELU has been replaced, For detailed operations, see 2.7.4Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

4 APM30H The input power cable for the APM30H has been replaced. Fordetailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cable for theAPM30H.

5 APM30H The input power cable for the junction box has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

6 APM30H The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

7 APM30H The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

8 APM30H The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 2.10.1 Installingthe BBU Case.

9 APM30H The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

10 APM30H The monitoring signal transfer cable and CMUEA-BBUmonitoring signal cable have been installed. For detailedoperations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

11 APM30H The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

12 TMC11H The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

13 TMC11H The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

14 TMC11H The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 2.10.1 Installingthe BBU Case.




248

No.

Cabinet Type Item

15 TMC11H The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

16 TMC11H The CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable has been installed.For detailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in theCabinet.

17 TMC11H The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

18 RFC The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 2.8.3Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

19 RFC The monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor,monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, and ELU signalcable have been installed. For detailed operations, see 2.8.7Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

20 RFC In DC scenarios, the junction box has been installed. For detailedoperations, see 2.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC JunctionBox.

21 RFC In AC scenarios, the input power cable for the RFC has beenreplaced. For detailed operations, see Installing Power Cablesfrom the APM30H to the RFCs.

22 RFC The shield layer of the RRU power cable has been grounded. Fordetailed operations, see (Optional) Installing the RRU PowerCable or (Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable.

23 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 2.9.3Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.


Prerequisitesl Input power cables for the BTS3900A are correctly connected.

l The power supply to the BTS3900A meets the requirements of the power system.

l The external power supply to the BTS3900A has been shut off.




249

l All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.l All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been set to OFF.l All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T have

been set to OFF.l Switch on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T has been set to OFF.l Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.l Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.

Context

DANGERExercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves some high voltageoperations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact with the input voltage usinga damp object may be fatal.

NOTICEl Power on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it. If you power off a cabinet or

BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU for

maintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.




250

Table 2-47 Circuit breakers in BTS3900A base stations

BaseStation

Power Device(1) Circuit Breaker

BTS3900A(Ver.B)

EPS 01A or EPS 01C,DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,DCDU-03C, or powerdistribution box

l Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A or EPS 01Cl BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2

circuit breakers on the power distribution boxin an IBBS200D or IBBS200T

l SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU0 toRFU5 circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 (Thecircuit breakers control the power input to theBBU, fan assembly, and RFUs.)

l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control thepower input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fanassembly, and customer transmissionequipment.)

l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control thepower input to the BBU, fan assembly, andcustomer transmission equipment.)

BTS3900A(Ver.C)

EPU03A-02 orEPU03A-04,DCDU-11A,DCDU-11B,DCDU-11C, and powerdistribution box

l Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02 orEPU03A-04

l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2circuit breakers on the power distribution boxin an IBBS200D or IBBS200T

l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11A (SW0 to SW8 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,FAN 01B, and BBU 0 and BBU 1. The SW9circuit breaker is reserved.)

l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA, and FAN 02B. TheSW9 circuit breaker is reserved.)

l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on theDCDU-11C (SW0 to SW5 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to the transmissionequipment. SW6 to SW9 circuit breakerscontrol the power input to BBU 0 and BBU 1,EMUA, and FAN 02B.)




251

BaseStation


BTS3900A(Ver.D)



l BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers onthe power distribution box in an IBBS200D orIBBS200T

l Switch on the power distribution box in anIBBS700D or IBBS700T

NOTE

(1) In this section, EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 and EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 are shortened to EPU, EPS 01Aor EPS 01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.

ProcessThe following figure shows the power-on check process.




252

Figure 2-185 Power-on check process

Procedurel Power on an AC base station.




253

1. Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply andthe ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.

2. Optional: If the base station is configured with a battery cabinet, set the BAT circuitbreaker on the EPU or EPS to ON and set the circuit breaker on the power distributionbox in the battery cabinet to ON. Otherwise, skip this substep.

3. Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and batterycabinet.

4. Set the circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS for the corresponding components to ON,and check the power supply status of each component.

Table 2-48 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU or EPS

Cabinet Component

Normal Power Supply Status

APM30H PMU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

PSU l The power indicator is steady green.l The fault indicator is steady off.

Fanassembly

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).


Fan in thefront door

The fan is working properly.

IBBS200DorIBBS200T

Fan or TECin the frontdoor

The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the RUNindicator on the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA isblinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1sand off for 1s).

IBBS700D Fan in thefront doorandCMUEA

The fan is working properly, and the RUN indicatoron the CMUEA is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

IBBS700T TEC andCMUF

The TEC is working properly, and the RUN indicatoron the CMUF is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

5. Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on each DCDU

in the RFC and TMC11H to ON. Skip this substep if there is no circuit breaker on theDCDU, such as the DCDU-12A, DCDU-12B, and DCDU-12C.

6. Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.7. Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.




254

Table 2-49 Normal status of components in the cabinet

Cabinet Component


APM30H BBU l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s

and off for 1s).l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on

for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and offfor 1s). The indicators indicating the status of theCPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.

TMC11H FAN 02A/FAN 02B/FAN 02D





RFC RFU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).


FAN 01A/FAN 01B/FAN 01C



- RRU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s).


a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, checkwhether the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.

NOTE

The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other indicators, seeBBU Hardware Description.

8. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.




255

Table 2-50 Troubleshooting

Failure Type Handling Measure

Failure in the powersupply to allcomponents in thecabinet

Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit

breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power

units.

Failure in the powersupply to a board inthe BBU

Check as follows:1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the

slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.Replace the subrack if necessary.

2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the statusof indicators on the board.

3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove theboard, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards ofthe same type, and check the status of the indicators.l If the board works properly, the original slot is

faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,

replace the board.




256


Failure in the powersupply to othercomponents in thecabinet

Check as follows:1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block

that connects power supply to the component is on. Skipthis step and go to step 2 if this component does not useany fuse terminal block.l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the

fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse accordingto the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.

l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, goto step 2.

2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to thecomponent.l If the input power is normal, replace the component.l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the

power cable for the component is connectedsecurely. If the power cable is not securelyconnected, turn off the circuit breaker for thecomponent (if there is no circuit breaker for thecomponent, remove the connector from the powerunit) and reconnect the power cable. If the powercable is securely connected, the protector (such ascircuit breaker or fuse) on the component may bedamaged. In this case, replace the damagedprotector. If the protector cannot be replaced,replace the upper-level power distributioncomponent.

l Power on a DC base station.


2. Turn on the external power switch to power on the RFC cabinet. Power on theTMC11H if it is configured as a transmission cabinet.

3. Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the RFC to ON.Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as DCDU-12Aand DCDU-12B.

4. Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the TMC11Hto ON. Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such asDCDU-12C.





257


Cabinet Component


TMC11H BBU l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s


for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and offfor 1s).

FAN 02A/FAN 02B/FAN 02D










- RRU l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s andoff for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).


7. Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,

handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.






units.




258








replace the board.








----End




259


2.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet DoorThe barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label on the cabinetdoor need to be replaced after the upgrade.

ContextThe front door of the cabinet has been replaced during restructuring of the APM30H andTMC11H cabinets. You only need to replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card,and power distribution label.

Procedure

Step 1 Stick the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to theAPM30H and TMC11H cabinets. Their positions are shown in Figure 2-186.

Figure 2-186 Positions of labels for the cabinet

(1) Barcode label (2) Qualification card (3) Power distribution label (4) Nameplate

Step 2 Replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label in the RFCand IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinets.1. Take out the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label

for the cabinet.2. Stick the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to

the same positions as the original labels in the cabinet.

----End

2.14.2 Sealing the Cable OutletsAfter all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable outlets on the cabinet and base.




260

Procedure

Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes on both sides of the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC,IBBS200T, or IBBS200D cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 2-187 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, IBBS200T, orIBBS200D cabinet

(1) Fireproof mud

Step 2 Seal the RF cable holes in the RFC, as shown in the following figure.1. Route the cables through the corresponding cable holes, and install the cable outlet module

on the bottom of the cabinet.2. Use rubber caps to seal the unused cable holes in the cable outlet module.3. Tighten the screw on the cable outlet module.




261

Figure 2-188 Sealing the cable holes in the RFC

(1) Cable holes for thepower cables

(2) Cable holes for CPRIelectrical cables

(3) Cable hole for themonitoring signal cable

(4) Cable hole for theequipotential cable


(6) Screw - -

Step 3 Use baffle plates to block redundant space in the cable outlets and tighten the two screws oneach baffle plate, as shown in Figure 2-189.

Figure 2-189 Sealing the cable outlets on the base

(1) Baffle plate on the right (2) Baffle plate at the rear (3) Baffle plate on the left

Step 4 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in Figure 2-190.




262

Figure 2-190 Sealing cable outlets on the base using fireproof mud

(1) Fireproof mud (2) PVC corrugated pipe

Step 5 Tighten the three screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate.

----End

2.14.3 RepaintingThe paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept satisfactory. Therefore, any damaged paintmust be repaired.

PrerequisitesBefore repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to Table 2-53.

Table 2-53 Color codes

Applied to Color Huawei Code International Code

Cabinet RAL7035 YB026 RAL7035

Base 3010 light gray YB030 Pantone 422U

Procedure

Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, rub the area with sandpaperslightly to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in Figure 2-191.

Figure 2-191 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper




263

Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or dust from therubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with another clean cloth, as shown inFigure 2-192.

Figure 2-192 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol

Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color.

Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the paint. Then applythe paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be observed, as shown in Figure 2-193.

NOTICEThe paint coating should be as thin as possible. No drops are allowed on the paint coating, andthe surface should be smooth.

Figure 2-193 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet




264

Step 5 Perform subsequent operations after the repaired paint coating is exposed in the air for 30minutes.

NOTE

The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the surrounding areas, withoutobvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no longer be distinguishable. In addition, thereshould be no paint peeled off.

----End




265

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_B)

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.B)to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).








3.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet


3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_B)


266

This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFCcabinet to be restructured.










267



You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:l Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properly

before the upgrade.l Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.

Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need tocontact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.







3.1.3 DocumentsThis section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.


– 3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description– 3900 Series Base Station Cables– BBU3900 Hardware Description– RFU Hardware Description– BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Installation Guide– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide– BTS3900A (Ver.B) Site Maintenance Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Site Maintenance

Guide– Safety Precautions




268






Diagonal pliers











269

Gloves - -






3.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUsOnly

When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for theBTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and -48 V DC power supplyscenario.

Cabinet Configuration Principlesl A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.

l The maximum cabinet configuration of a BTS3900A site is 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. There must be a clearance of 40 mm (1.57 in.) betweenthe cabinets installed side by side.

l The RFC can only be stacked below the APM30H or TMC11H.

l The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, orTMC11H. The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can only be stacked below the TMC11H.

l When a site is configured with over six RFUs and only one IBBS200D or IBBS200T, theIBBS200D or IBBS200T must be configured with at least two groups of 92 Ah storagebatteries to avoid overcurrent of a single battery group during discharging.




270

l If an auxiliary cabinet such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H is required duringinitial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basiccabinet. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinetis positioned on the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on thebattery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.

l During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in thefuture. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain inthe original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In aspecial scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets.

l When a BTS3900A is configured with two BBUs and both BBUs are connected to RFUs,the BBUs must be interconnected.

l A BTS3900A configured with one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU bydefault. It can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumptionof all BBU boards cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to a new or expansionscenario.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-mode Base StationA single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, and the BBU is installedin the APM30H or TMC11H. When seven to twelve RFUs need to be configured, two RFCs arerequired.



PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC

≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1TMC11H

≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1TMC11H

Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided byone batterycabinet

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T

≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T





271

PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H


≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1TMC11H

Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided bytwo batterycabinets

≤ 5 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 5 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 16 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H

≤ 16 U ≤ 12 RFUs 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H

-48 V DC - ≤ 9 U ≤ 6 RFUs 1 TMC11H+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs 1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

≤ 20 U ≤ 6 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

≤ 12 RFUs 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs





272

Figure 3-1 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is nobackup power

NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 3-1 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1 TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the originalconfiguration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H.

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-2 andFigure 3-3.




273





274






275


NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 3-4 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H is the initialconfiguration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode basestation in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurationsare shown in Figure 3-5.




276

Figure 3-5 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 3-5 are two modes of configuring 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs. (A) indicates that 2TMC11Hs+2 RFCs is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the originalconfiguration of 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC.

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base StationTwo BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:l Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30H

and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the

BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.



PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower

≤ 3 U ≤ 12 RFUs(1)

1 APM30H+2 RFCs




277

PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1TMC11H







≤ 3 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

≤ 14 U 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1TMC11H

-48 V DC - ≤ 7 U 1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

≤ 18 U 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

NOTE

(1) A maximum of 12 RFUs are supported by a triple-mode base station. If there are more than 12 RFUs,an extra base station is required.

In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment areshown in Figure 3-6.




278


When a single cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station withdifferent space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 3-7.




279

Figure 3-7 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is providedby a single battery cabinet

When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 3-8.




280


When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station areshown in Figure 3-9.




281


3.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUsand RRUs

When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for theBTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and –48 V DC power supplyscenario.

Cabinet Configuration Principlesl A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and nine RRUs.

Therefore, more than one BTS3900As must be deployed if more than six RFUs and nineRRUs are required.

l When a BTS3900A is configured with both RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is needed tobe installed in RFC, the maximum configuration of RRUs is six RRUs of 2*60 W and threeRRUs of 2*40 W.

l When both the RFU and RRU support the GSM mode, the BBU3900 must be configuredwith a GTMUb. In addition, the RFUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to theGTMUb, and the RRUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the UBRI.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base StationA single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in theAPM30H or TMC11H.




282



PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower


1 APM30H+1 RFC


Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided byone storagebatterycabinet





Initialconfiguration of backuppowerprovided bytwo storagebatterycabinets



-48 V DC - ≤ 9 U 1 TMC11H+1 RFC






283

Figure 3-10 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there isno backup power

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of differentspace required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup poweris provided by one battery cabinet




284



When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-modebase station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrierconfigurations are shown in Figure 3-13.

Figure 3-13 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DCscenario

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station


l Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30Hand transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.





285



PowerSupply

BackupPowerCapacity




110 V AC or220 V AC

No backuppower


1 APM30H+1 RFC










-48 V DC - ≤ 7 U 1 TMC11H+1 RFC


In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinetconfigurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment andcarrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-14.




286


When a single battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure3-15 and Figure 3-16.




287





288


When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base stationwith different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure3-17.




289


When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station inthe case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shownin Figure 3-18.




290



ContextNOTE






Procedure





291

If... Then...


Go to Step 2.




If... Then...






If... Then...






----End





292

Restructuring Process in AC Scenarios

Figure 3-19 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied withAC power.


Restructuring Process in DC Scenarios

Figure 3-20 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied withDC power.




293






294

Context

From MBTS V100R009C00 onwards, the name of the element management system (EMS) ischanged from M2000 to U2000.

Procedure


NOTE



1. Check the maximum output power has been locked for TX channels of the new RFU, andrecord the result.

l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinetnumber, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU. Run theDSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number,and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum output power forTX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has been locked.



If... Then...


Go to Step 1.2.


Go to 2.

NOTE



l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable themaximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to reset




295

the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum outputpower of each RFU is set successfully.



NOTE


Step 2 Ask the M2000/U2000 administrator to block the RFU.




NOTE





Step 4 Power off the RFC.

If... Then...

RFC(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 in the RFC.

RFC(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11A in the RFC.

Step 5 Power off the TMC.

If... Then...

TMC11H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C in theTMC.

TMC11H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C in theTMC.




296

Step 6 Switch off all circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200T or IBBS200D.

Step 7 Power off the APM30H.

If... Then...

APM30H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPS in the APM30H.

APM30H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPU in the APM30H.

Step 8 Turn off the switch on the external power equipment for the BTS3900A.

----End









297

No. Component

Change Type

Description


The FAN 02A needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D toenhance the heat dissipation capability.

2 SLPU Reused -

3 ELU To bereplaced


4 PSU (AC/DC)

To bereplaced


5 Door statussensor

Reused -

6 EPS 01subrack

To bereplaced

The EPS 01 subrack needs to be replaced with anEPU05A to meet higher requirements for the powersystem.

7 BBU3900 Reused -

8 GATM To beremoved

-

9 EMUA Reused -

10 AC heater Reused -

11 SOU Reused -



13 Junctionbox

Reused -

14 PMU To bereplaced

The PMU needs to be replaced to enhance the powerdistribution capability.


The FAN 02B needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D toenhance the heat dissipation capability.

16 EPU03Asubrack

To bereplaced

The EPS 03A subrack needs to be replaced with anEPU05A to meet higher requirements for the powersystem.




298

No. Component

Change Type

Description








299

No.




P1

Inputpowercable forajunctionbox


l One endconnectsto the L1and N1terminalsin the ACOUTPUTterminalbox of theEPS.

l The otherendconnectsto the Land Nterminalsin thejunctionbox.


l One endconnects to theL1 and N1terminals in theAC OUTPUTterminal box ofthe EPU.

l The other endconnects to theL and Nterminals in thejunction box.

Reused

P2

Powercable forthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H




l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton the fanassemblyin theAPM30H.




l The other endconnects to thePWR port onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.

Tobereplaced




300

No.




P3

BBUpowercable




l The otherendconnectsto the-48V porton theUPEU inthe BBU.



l One endconnects to theBBU_0 orBBU_1 port onthe EPU.

l The other endconnects to the-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU.

Tobereplaced

P4

EMUApowercable




l The otherendconnectsto thePWR1port ontheEMUA.




l The other endconnects to thePWR1 port onthe EMUA.

Theycanbeusedcontinuouslyandtheirconnectorsneedto bereplacedonsite.




301

No.




P5

SOUpowercable



l One endconnectsto the M4groundscrew,L1, andN1terminals(ACOUTPUT) on theEPS.

l The otherendconnectsto the ACINPUTport onthe SOU.



l One endconnects to theM4 groundscrew, L1, andN1 terminals(AC OUTPUT)on the EPU.

l The other endconnects to theAC INPUT porton the SOU.

Reused

P6

Heaterpowercable



l One endconnectsto the ACoutputwiringterminalin the ACjunctionbox andthegroundbar in theAPM30Hcabinet

l The otherendconnectsto thepowerinput porton theheater.



l One endconnects to theAC outputwiring terminalin the ACjunction boxand the groundbar in theAPM30Hcabinet

l The other endconnects to thepower inputport on theheater.

Reused




302

No.




P7








Tobereplaced






303




S1 Environment monitoringsignal cable



l Theotherendconnectsto thePMU_DB50 porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.



l Theother endconnectsto thePMU_DB50 porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.

Removed

S2 Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatussensor in theAPM30H



l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.




l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H.


Reused




304




S3 Monitoringsignaltransfercable


l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN porton thePMU.

l Theotherendconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.


l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN port onthePMU.

l Theother endconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.

To bereplaced

S4 CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable


l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.

l Theotherendconnectsto theMON0port ontheUPEU intheBBU.

- - To bereplaced




305




S5 ELU signalcable



l Theotherendconnectsto theELUport onthe fanassembly in theAPM30H.



l Theother endconnectsto theELU porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.

Reused

S6 Monitoringsignal cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor



l Theotherendconnectsto theFAN_EXT porton thefanassembly in theAPM30H.



l Theother endconnectsto theFAN_EXT porton thefanassemblyin theAPM30H.

To bereplaced




306








l Theotherendconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thePMU.




l Theother endconnectsto theCOM_OUT porton thePMU.

Reused

S8 Surgeprotectiontransfercable for themonitoringsignals



l Theotherendconnectsto theEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEU intheBBU.



l Theother endconnectsto theEXT_ALM0port ontheUPEU inthe BBU.

Reused




307







l One endconnectsto theGPS porton theUSCU intheBBU.

l Theotherendconnectsto a GPSsurgeprotector.



l One endconnectsto theGPS porton theUSCU inthe BBU.

l Theother endconnectsto a GPSsurgeprotector.

Reused

S10 CMUE-BBUmonitoringsignal cable


l One endconnectsto theCOM_IN port onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H.

l Theother endconnectsto theMON0port ontheUPEU inthe BBU.

To bereplaced





308


Procedure




If... Then...














309



in Figure 3-25.






310



NOTE









311







312


If... Then...









----End

3.6.3 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The fanassemblies in the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the proceduresfor removing the fan assemblies from the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.


Procedure





313


Step 2 Optional: Remove the power cable for the fan assembly to power off the fan assembly. Skipthis step if this cable has been disconnected during the replacement of the front door.

If... Then...

An APM30H(Ver.B) is used


A TMC11H(Ver.B) is used


An APM30H(Ver.C) is used


A TMC11H(Ver.C) is used


Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fan

assembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 3-30.

NOTE





314





NOTE





315



----End



Context

The ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-32.





316

Procedure














317

NOTE








l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195


l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393


l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398


l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395





2. Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.

3. Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.




318




----End



Contextl Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.l The procedure for replacing the power system of the APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H

(Ver.C) is the same. The figures in this section uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.l Figure 3-36 shows component changes in the AC/DC power system.




319

Figure 3-36 Component changes in the AC/DC power system

(1) PMU 01B (2) PSU(EPW30-48A)

(3) EPS 01subrack

(4) PSU(PSU4850A)

(5) EPU03Asubrack

(6) PMU 11A (7) PSU(R4850G2)

(8) EPU05Asubrack

Procedure



Step 2 Remove cables from the EPS or EPU.1. Disconnect the ground cable for the EPS or EPU from the ground bar on the inner left wall

of the cabinet.2. Loosen the two captive screws on the metal protective cover on the left side of the EPS or

EPU, and then remove the protective cover.3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the plastic protective covers from the AC input and

output wiring terminal blocks on the left side of the EPS or EPU.4. Record the connections of the AC input power cable and AC output power cable, and then

remove the cables.




320

5. Reinstall the two plastic protective covers, and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M4screws to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

6. Record the connections of the DC power cables on the EPS or EPU panel, and then removethe DC power cables.

7. Record the connections of the DC power cables that are connected to the power cables onthe right side of the EPS or EPU, and then remove the DC power cables.

Step 3 Remove the PMU and all PSUs from the EPS or EPU.

NOTICEThe original EPS or EPU contains one PMU and three PSUs and therefore is heavy. You areadvised to remove the PMU and PSUs before removing the EPS or EPU.

1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of eachPSU.

2. Pull the handle slightly to slide each PSU out of the subrack and remove each PSU fromthe subrack, as shown in Figure 3-37.

Figure 3-37 Removing the PSUs

3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of the

PMU.4. Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU out of the subrack and remove the PMU from the

subrack, as shown in Figure 3-38.




321

Figure 3-38 Removing the PMU

Step 4 Remove the plate for the power series 120 connector from the right side of the EPS or EPU, asshown in Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39 Removing the plate for the power series 120 connector

Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the remaining seven screws from both sides of the EPS orEPU, and remove the EPS or EPU from the cabinet along the guide rails slowly, as shown inFigure 3-40.

NOTICEThe EPS or EPU subrack is heavy. Therefore, you need to hold the subrack with one hand andsupport the bottom with the other hand to slowly pull the subrack out of the cabinet. This preventsthe subrack from falling and ensures personal safety.




322

Figure 3-40 Removing the EPS or EPU

Step 6 Remove the metal support from the left side of the EPS or EPU.

1. Loosen the two captive screws on the cover plate of the metal support.

2. Remove the two screws from the metal support and remove the metal support, as shown inFigure 3-41.

Figure 3-41 Removing the metal support

Step 7 Place the removed EPS or EPU subrack, PSUs, PMU, and metal support into an ESD box orbag.




323

Step 8 Optional: Install the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall ofthe cabinet. Only an APM30H (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an APM30H(Ver.C) is used, skip this step.


1. Remove the guide rails on the left side of the position where the EPS or EPU is originallyinstalled, as shown by a in Figure 3-42. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve the screws.

2. Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mountingbar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton paddingcontacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in Figure 3-42.

3. Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 8.1 to secure the guide rails and tighten the screwsto 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown by c in Step 8.1.

Figure 3-42 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner leftside of the cabinet


padding for about 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in Figure 3-43.2. Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completely

strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of thecabinet, as shown by b and c in Figure 3-43.




324


Step 10 Install the windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet, as shown in Figure3-44.



screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).




325


Step 11 Install a new EPU.1. Place the new EPU on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the power system

into the cabinet.2. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven panel screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.) and one

hex screw to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.) so that the EPU subrack is secured.3. Use M6x12 screws to secure the ground cable for the new EPU to the ground bar. The

recommended torque is 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

----End


Prerequisitesl The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. When

DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.l If the BTS3900A has two GATMs, remove the upper one before the lower one.

Procedure

Step 1 Power off the GATM. The following table lists the terminals that can be used by a GATM powercable, which may differ from the actually used terminal.




326

If... Then...


Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATMpower cable from the LOAD4 port on the EPS.

If anAPM30H(Ver.C) isused

Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATMpower cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPU.

Step 2 Remove the GATM.


2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the ground cable for the GATM. Then use a wrenchto remove the RF jumper from the GATM.

3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, remove theGATM, and secure the removed screws on their original positions on the mounting bar, asshown in Figure 3-45.

NOTE

The method of removing the GATM from an APM30H (Ver.B) is the same as the method of removing itfrom an APM30H (Ver.C). The following figure uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.


Step 3 Remove the Bias-Tee.

1. Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable and PGND cable.


3. Use a wrench to connect the jumper and the feeder to 25 N·m to 35 N·m (221.25 lbf·in. to309.75 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 3-46.




327

Figure 3-46 Connecting the jumper and the feeder


----End

3.6.7 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30H cabinetafter you restructure the APM30H.








Remarks


EPC4connector


3V3connector






328





Remarks

Input powercable for thejunction box

OT terminals(M4)

M4 groundscrew aswell as L1,and N1terminalsnear the ACOUTPUTsilkscreen onthe EPU intheAPM30H

OT terminals L and Nterminals inthe junctionbox

To be reused

EMUApower cable

EPC4connector


Cord endterminals

PWR1 porton theEMUA


BBU powercable

EPC4connector


3V3connector









Remarks


2-pinconnector

GATE porton the PMU


To be reused

ELU signalcable

RJ45connector

ELU RJ45connector


To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor



4-pinconnector






329





Remarks


RJ45connector


RJ45connector



Monitoringsignaltransfercable

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe fanassembly ofthe APM30H



DB9 maleconnector

RS-485 porton theEMUA

RJ45connector


To be reused


Remove the related cables listed in Table 3-7 and Table 3-8. If the cables have beenremoved during the module replacement, skip this step.

l Install power cables in the APM30H.



b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD2 porton the EPU.

c. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe fan assembly in the APM30H, and use a torque wrench to tighten the screwson the 3V3 connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54 lbf·in.).


a. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For detailed operations, seeAssembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling theEPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD5 port on the panel of the EPU.

c. Connect the one end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD5port on the EPU.

d. Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 porton the EMUA.

3. Install input power cable for the junction box, as shown by P3 in Figure 3-47.




330

a. Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L1 and N1terminals near the AC OUTPUT silkscreen on the EPU, and tighten the terminalsto 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

b. Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L andN terminals in the junction box, and tighten the terminals to 1.2 N·m (10.62lbf·in.).



NOTE


b. Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD0 or LOAD1 port on the panel ofthe EPU.

c. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD0 orLOAD1 port on the EPU.

d. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on theUPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).



6. Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

l Install signal cables in the APM30H.





331




a. Connect one end of the signal cable to the GATE port on the PMU.b. Connect the other end of the signal cable to the door status sensor.








a. Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.

b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_INport on the PMU.

6. Optional: Install the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, as shown by S6 in Figure3-48.


b. Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the PMU.




332


7. Optional: Install the surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals.

a. Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of theSLPU.

b. Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in theBBU.

c. Connect the other three surge protection transfer cables, as shown in Figure3-49.

Figure 3-49 Connections of surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals


9. Label the installed cables according to Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End




333


3.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theTMC11H Cabinet

This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the TMC11H cabinet.

Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Components in the TMC11HCabinet

There are two types of TMC11Hs:l One type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration A in

Figure 3-50.l The other type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as

shown in illustration B in Figure 3-50.




334


No. Component

Change Type

Remarks

1 Fanassembly

To bereplaced


2 SLPU To bereused

-

3 ELU To bereplaced


4 DCDU-03C

To bereplaced





335

No. Component

Change Type

Remarks


-

6 Door statussensor

To bereused

-

7 Environmentmonitoringunit type A(EMUA)

To bereused

-


-



10 Junctionbox

To bereused

-

11 DCDU-11B, orDCDU-11C

To bereplaced


Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Cables in the TMC11HCabinet

Figure 3-51 shows the power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet that housesthe BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power.

Figure 3-51 Power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet




336


Connector


Connector


P1 Powercable forthe fanassembly intheTMC11H









To bereplaced

P2 BBU powercable







l One endconnects to theLOAD6orLOAD7port ontheDCDU-11C.


To bereplaced




337


Connector


Connector


P3 EMUApowercable









They can beusedcontinuously and theirconnectorsneed to bereplacedonsite.

P4 Equipotential cable forgroundingof the frontdoor







To bereplaced

Figure 3-52 shows the signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses the BBU3900 and issupplied with -48 V DC power.




338

Figure 3-52 Signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet


Connector


Connector











To bereused




339


Connector


Connector


S2 CMUA-BBUmonitoring signalcable




- - To bereplaced




340


Connector


Connector


S3 ELUsignalcable







To bereused




341


Connector


Connector









To bereplaced




342


Connector


Connector











To bereused




343


Connector


Connector


S6 Surgeprotectiontransfercable forthemonitoring signals







To bereused










To bereplaced




344


Connector


Connector


S8 CMUE-BBUmonitoring signalcable




To bereplaced


Prerequisites

The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nose pliers.

Procedure





345



If... Then...














346



in Figure 3-54.






347



NOTE









348







349


If... Then...









----End



Procedure





350


Step 2 (Optional) Turn off the circuit breaker LOAD8 on the DCDU-03C. Skip this step if the fanassembly has been powered off during replacement of the front door.


1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.

2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fanassembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 3-59.

NOTE








351


NOTE




----End



ContextThe ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-61.




352


Procedure











353




NOTE








l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195


l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393


l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398


l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395




354







Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic labelinformation of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplatein the upgrade package.

l If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.

l If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.


----End

3.7.5 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDUs in an TMC11H.These DCDUs include the DCDU-03B, DCDU-03C, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-11C.

Prerequisites


Context

The following table helps you determine whether a DCDU needs to be replaced with aDCDU-12B or DCDU-12C.




TMC11H(Ver.B)


DCDU-03C DCDU-12C




355





DCDU-03B DCDU-12B


DCDU-03C DCDU-12C


DCDU-03C DCDU-12C

TMC11H(Ver.C)


DCDU-11C DCDU-12C


DCDU-11B DCDU-12B


DCDU-11C DCDU-12C


DCDU-11C DCDU-12C

Procedure






356

Step 2 Power off the DCDU according to the following table.

If... Then...

A DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B needs to bepowered off


A DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C in a TMC11Hneeds to be powered off, and the TMC11H onlyprovides transmission space

Turn off the TMC circuit breaker on theEPS in the APM30H.

At a BTS3900A site, a DCDU-03C in aTMC11H needs to be powered off, and theTMC11H houses BBU3900 and is suppliedwith -48 V DC power

Turn off the SPARE2 circuit breaker on theDCDU-01 in the RFC.

A DCDU-11C in a TMC11H needs to bepowered off, and the TMC11H housesBBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power


At a DBS3900 site, a DCDU-03C or DCDU-11Cin a TMC11H needs to be powered off, and theTMC11H houses BBU3900 and is suppliedwith -48 V DC power


Step 3 Remove the DCDU.1. Remove all cable connectors from the DCDU.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal






357




Step 5 Install a new DCDU-12B.




358

1. Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting earson both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.

2. Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).


----End

3.7.6 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC11H cabinetafter restructuring the TMC11H cabinet.








Description


EPC4connector


3V3connector



BBU powercable

EPC4connector


3V3connector



EMUApower cable

EPC4connector


Cord endterminals







359






Description




Reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector



ELU signalcable

RJ45connector

ELU RJ45connector


Reused



Power cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor of theTMC11Hcabinet

4-pinconnector


Newlydeliveredcable


DB9 maleconnector


RJ45connector


Reused

Procedurel Install power cables in the TMC11H cabinet.

1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the TMC11H cabinet, as shown by P1in Figure 3-67.

a. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD9 porton the DCDU-12C.


2. Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-67. If a BBU isnot installed in the cabinet, skip this step.


b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 orLOAD7 port on the DCDU-12C.




360

c. Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on theUPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 N·m (3.54lbf·in.).


a. Replace the OT terminals at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4connector, as described in Table 3-10. For details about how to replace theterminals, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD8 porton the DCDU-12C.

c. Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 porton the EMUA.

Figure 3-67 Installing power cables in the TMC11H cabinet



l Install signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet.

1. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to the GATEport on the fan assembly, as shown by S1 in Figure 3-68.

2. Optional: Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S2 inFigure 3-68. If a BBU is not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.








361







b. Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.

Figure 3-68 Installing signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet



----End






362



No. Component

Change Type

Description


The DCDU-01 needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A toenhance the power distribution capability.

2 ELU To bereplaced


3 Door statussensor

Reused -


The FAN 01A needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C toenhance the heat dissipation capability.

5 RFU To bereplaced

The original RFUs are replaced by new RFUs withenhanced capacities.

6 DCDU-11A

To bereplaced

The DCDU-11A needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12Ato enhance the power distribution capability.




363

No. Component

Change Type

Description


The FAN 01B needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C toenhance the heat dissipation capability.

8 DCJunctionBox

- l The DC junction box in an RFC (Ver.B) uses one ortwo DC power inputs and provides two DC poweroutputs.

l The original DC junction box will be used in the RFC(Ver.C).






364

No.




P0

DCDU-11Apowercable

- - Both ends areOTterminals.

l One endconnects to theRTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals on theDCDU-11A.

l The other endconnects to theDC junctionbox.

Reused

P1

Powercable forthe fanassemblyin theRFC



l One endconnectsto theFAN porton theDCDU-01.

l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton the fanassemblyin theRFC.



l One endconnects to theLOAD6 port ontheDCDU-11A.

l The other endconnects to thePWR port onthe fanassembly in theRFC.

Tobereplaced




365

No.




P2toP7

RFUpowercables



l One endconnectsto one ofthe RFU0to RFU5ports ontheDCDU-01.

l The otherendconnectsto thePWR porton anRRUamongRFU 0 toRFU 5.



l One endconnects to oneof the LOAD0to LOAD5ports on theDCDU-11A inthe RFC.

l The other endconnects to thePWR port on anRRU amongRFU 0 to RFU5.

Tobereplaced

P8








Reused





366





S1 MonitoringSignalCable forthe DoorStatusSensor


l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.





Reused




367




S2 ELU signalcable







Reused

S3 Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in theRFC



l One endconnectsto theTEMport onthe fanassembly in theRFC.

l Theotherend isboundnearbythe airintakevent atthebottomof theRFC.



l One endconnectsto theTEMport onthe fanassemblyin theRFC.

l Theother endis boundnearbythe airintakevent atthebottomof theRFC.

Reused

3.8.2 Replacing the Fan AssemblyThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. Theprocedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C) is the same as the procedure forreplacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B).




368


Procedure



Step 2 Power off the fan assembly.

If... Then...

An RFC (Ver.B)is used

Turn off the FAN circuit breaker on the DCDU-01.

An RFC (Ver.C)is used

Turn off the SW6 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11A.

Step 3 Remove the original fan assembly.1. Record all cable connections on the panel of the fan assembly.2. Remove all the cables from the front panel of the fan assembly.3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears on both sides

of the fan assembly, and pull the box out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, asshown in Figure 3-72.

NOTE

The procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B) is the same as the procedure for replacinga fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C). Figure 3-72 uses an RFC (Ver.C) as an example.




369


4. Place the removed fan assembly into an ESD box or bag.

Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four screws on the mounting ears on both sides to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).


----End



ContextThe ELU is on the inner right side of the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-73.




370


Procedure











371




NOTE








l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195


l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393


l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398


l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395




372










----End

3.8.4 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-01 or DCDU-11Ain an RFC.


ContextAs shown by Figure 3-77, a DCDU-01 is located in the top 1 U space of an RFC (Ver.B). TheDCDU-11A in an RFC (Ver.C) is in the same position as the DCDU-01.




373

Figure 3-77 Position of the DCDU-01

Procedure


NOTICETake proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESDgloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.

Step 2 Switch off all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU to power off the fan assembly and RFUs.

Step 3 Power off the DCDU.

If... Then...

An RFC (Ver.B)is installed in anAC powersupply scenario

Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPS.

An RFC (Ver.B)is installed in aDC powersupply scenario


An RFC (Ver.C)is installed in anAC powersupply scenario

Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPU.




374

If... Then...

An RFC (Ver.C)is installed in aDC powersupply scenario


Step 4 Remove the old DCDU.1. Record the positions of all connectors on the DCDU, and remove the connectors.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal



NOTE

The procedure for removing a DCDU-01 is the same as that for removing a DCDU-11A. Figure 3-78 and Figure3-79 use a DCDU-11A as an example.





375



Step 6 Install a new DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 3-81.1. Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 3-80.

Figure 3-80 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A

(1) Double-sided tape

2. Place the new DCDU-12A on the guide rails of the installation position and slide theDCDU-12A into the cabinet.

3. Tighten the two screws on each side of the DCDU-12A to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).




376


(1) DCDU-12A (2) Cable claw


----End

3.8.5 Replacing the RFUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the RFU.

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or a pairof ESD gloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.


V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, and LRFU.

l If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) is not faulty, disable its maximum output power lockingfor TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.

l Replacing an RFU interrupts services carried by the RFU.

l Replacing an RFU takes about 6 to 10 minutes.

l The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. WhenDRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced. For details abouthow to remove the GATM and Bias-Tee, see 3.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM andBias-Tee.

l A handle is used during the replacement. The handle is placed on the lower left side of thedocument holder on the cabinet door, as shown in Figure 3-82.




377


NOTE


Procedure


NOTE


Step 2 Remove the RFU to be replaced.1. Turn off the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to power off the

RFU.2. Label the power cable for the RFU to be replaced, and disconnect the cable.3. Label the RF jumper for the RFU to be replaced, loosen the DIN 7/16 male elbow connector

on the RF jumper, and disconnect the RF jumper.4. Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the fiber.5. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws at the four corners of the RFU, and then







378


Step 3 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC, as shown inFigure 3-84. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) isused, skip this step.


2. Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of theRFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure3-84, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.


Figure 3-84 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC

(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom rightside of the RFC

Step 4 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC, as shown in Figure3-85. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is used, skipthis step.




379


2. Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom left side of theRFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure3-85, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.


Figure 3-85 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC

(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottomleft side of the RFC

Step 5 Install the new RFU.

1. Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the rails until it snaps into place.

2. Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners of the RFU panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.) tosecure the RFU to the subrack.


----End

3.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction BoxThe DC junction box in an RFC converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.Skip this section if an RFC (Ver.C) is used, which has already been configured with a DC junctionbox.


Contextl In AC scenarios, the RFC power terminals in the EPU are connected to the DCDU-12A,

which then distributes DC power to the RFC, the DC junction box is not configured.




380

l In DC scenarios, the external power supply is directly connected to the DC junction box,which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.

Procedure



Step 2 Remove the DC junction box, as shown in Figure 3-86.1. Remove the screw from the protective cover for the DC junction box and then remove

protective cover.2. Remove the two screws from the DC junction box and then remove the DC junction box.

Figure 3-86 Removing the DC junction box

Step 3 Install the DC junction box in the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-87.1. Remove the two M6 screws from the left wall of the RFC.2. Align the two holes on the right side of the installation plate with the two holes left in Step

3.1, and secure them with the two removed M6 screws to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.).3. Place the DC junction box on the installation plate, and secure them with two M4 screws

to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).




381

Figure 3-87 Installing the DC junction box

NOTE

It is recommended that the protective cover be reinstalled after all required cables are connected to the DCjunction box.

----End

3.8.7 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC cabinetafter you restructure the RFC.






382






Description

Power cablefor the fanassembly inthe RFC

EPC4connector

LOAD6 porton theDCDU-12A

3V3connector



Input powercable fromthe DCjunction boxto theDCDU-12Ain the RFC

OT terminal(M6)

DC junctionbox in theRFC

OT terminals DCDU-12Ain the RFC

l A 0.3 m(0.98 ft)cablewith ablue wireand ablackwire isnewlydeliveredfor anRFC(Ver.B).

l Theoriginalcable isused in anRFC(Ver.C).Thenewlydeliveredcable canbedisposedof.




383





Description

RFU powercables

EPC4connector

One ofLOAD0 toLOAD5ports on theDCDU-12A

3V3connector


Six RFUpower cablesare newlydelivered.Power cablesfor RFU 0 toRFU 2 are1.5 m (4.92ft) and powercables forRFU 3 toRFU 5 are1.1 m (3.61ft).







Description




Reused

ELU signalcable

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

ELU Reused


4-pinconnector

TEM port onthe fanassembly inthe RFC

Temperaturesensor

Air intakevent at thebottom of anRFC

Reused


1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the RFC, as shown by P1 in Figure3-88.




384

a. Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 porton the DCDU-12A.


2. Optional: Install the input power cable for the RFC (from the DC junction box to theDCDU-12A), as shown by P2 in Figure 3-88. If the cabinet is an RFC (Ver.B) in anAC power supply scenario, skip this step.

a. Optional: Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+)and NEG(-) terminals in the DC junction box on an inner wall of the RFC, andtighten the terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.). In an RFC (Ver.C), one end ofthe power cable has been connected to the DC junction box. Therefore, skip thisstep for an RFC (Ver.C).

b. Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN+ andNEG- terminals on the DCDU-12A, and tighten the terminals to 4.8 N·m (42.48lbf·in.).


a. Connect the end of the power cables with an EPC4 connector to one of theLOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12A.

b. Connect the end of the power cables with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port onthe corresponding RFU, and tighten the screws on the connectors to 0.4 N·m(3.54 lbf·in.).





385






b. Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU porton the fan assembly in the RFC.

2. Connect one end of the door status monitoring signal cable with bare wires to theGATE port on the fan assembly, as shown by S2 in Figure 3-89.

3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the RFC, as shownby S3 in Figure 3-89.

a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the temperature sensor nearthe air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.

b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEM port on the fan assembly in the RFC.






386


----End


3.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theIBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet

This section describes the changes to be made on the components and cables in an IBBS200Dor IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.

Component Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet

The component changes in the IBBS200D cabinet are the same as those in the IBBS200T cabinet.This section uses the IBBS200D as an example. Figure 3-90 shows component changes in theIBBS200D cabinet.

Figure 3-90 Components in the IBBS200D cabinet

No. Component

Change Type

Description

1 ELU To bereplaced


2 Storagebattery

Reused -




387

No. Component

Change Type

Description

3 Door statussensor

Reused -


To bereplaced


5 Junctionterminal forthe inputpowercable of theheatingfilm

Reused -

- Batterytemperature sensor

Reused -

Cable Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T CabinetFigure 3-91 shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the IBBS200T.





388

No.





Position

P1

Powertransfercable forthe fan orTEC inthe frontdoor



l One endconnectsto theCMUA.




l One endconnects to thePWR port onthe CMUE.


Tobereplaced

P2

RTN(+)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries







Tobereplaced

P3

NEG(-)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries







Tobereplaced




389

No.





Position

P4

RTN(+)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries







Tobereplaced

P5

NEG(-)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries







Tobereplaced

P6








Tobereused(replacement oftheterminalsnotrequired)




390





ChangeType





l One endconnectsto theGATEport onthe fanassembly in theRFcabinet(RFC).





Reused




391



ChangeType



S2 ELU signalcable







Reused



DANGERWhen replacing batteries, prevent short circuits or reverse connections between the positive andnegative poles of the storage batteries. All tools used for installation must be insulated to preventthe batteries from burning and to ensure personal safety.

ContextBefore replacing the power distribution box, remove all storage batteries from the cabinet.

Procedure





392



If... Then...

An IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T(Ver.B) is used

1. Remove the tool-less female connector(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on theEPS.

2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker onthe EPS.


4. Turn off the BAT circuit breaker on the EPS.

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C) 1. Remove the tool-less female connector(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on theEPU.

2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker onthe EPU.


4. Turn off the FAN/TEC_SW2 circuit breakeron the power distribution box.


1. Remove the terminal covers from the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 3-93.





393


the storage batteries and the serial connection copper bars between the storage batteries,and remove the input power cables and copper bars, as shown in Figure 3-94.



hands to remove the storage batteries at the same layer, and place the storage batteries ina safe position.

NOTE

l Remove the baffle plate and storage batteries layer by layer from top down. After removing thebaffle plate at one layer, you must remove all storage batteries at this layer before removing thebaffle plate at the lower layer.



Step 4 Remove the storage battery power cables and power transfer cable for the TEC or fan in thefront door from the power distribution box.

Step 5 Remove the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 3-95.1. Remove the two screws from the left cover plate of the power distribution box and remove

the cover plate.2. Remove the four screws from the interior of the power distribution box.




394


3. Take the power distribution box out and use insulation tape to wrap the OT terminals onthe cables connected to the power distribution box.

4. Place the power distribution box into an ESD box or bag.

Step 6 Install rubber protective caps onto the screws for the earthquake-proof support on the top of thebattery cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-96.

Figure 3-96 Installing rubber protective caps

(1) Screws for the earthquake-proof support (2) Rubber protective caps

Step 7 Install cables in the power distribution box.




395

1. Remove the cover plate from the new power distribution box.2. Install cables in the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 3-97.

Figure 3-97 Installing cables in the power distribution box





NOTE

The power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the battery cabinet has been connectedto the new power distribution box before delivery.

Step 8 Install the power distribution box in the battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-98.1. Place the new power distribution box in the battery cabinet.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the four M4x8 screws in the power distribution box

to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).3. Install the cover plate on the left side of the power distribution box and tighten the two

M3x6 screws on the cover plate to 0.55 N·m (4.87 lbf·in.).




396


----End



a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

ContextThere is an ELU on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet, as shown inFigure 3-99.




397

Figure 3-99 Position of the ELU in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet

Procedure











398




NOTE








l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195


l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393


l Ver.B: 02113830l Ver.C: 02113398


l Ver.B: 02113827l Ver.C: 02113395




399










----End







400






Remarks

Powertransfercable for theTEC or fan inthe frontdoor

3V3connector


OT terminals(M4, 2.5mm2 or0.004 in.2)

PowerDistributionBox

Deliveredwith thepowerdistributionbox























Remarks

ELU signalcable

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

ELU To be reused




401





Remarks


Bare wire GATE porton theCMUEA


To be reused

Procedurel Install storage batteries and power cables in the battery cabinet.

1. Install the power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the cabinet, asshown by P1 in Figure 3-103.

2. Place power cables for the storage batteries. The NEG(-) cables are black and RTN(+) cables are red. P2 and P3 in Figure 3-103 show the routing of these power cables.


3. Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown inFigure 3-104.

NOTE

The battery cell should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reservedbetween battery cells.




402


4. Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 3-105.

a. Remove terminal covers from the storage batteries.

b. Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for seriesconnections.

c. Install the NEG(-) cables and then RTN(+) cables for the storage batteries, andtighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).






403

6. Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.l Install signal cables in the battery cabinet.


a. Connect the ELU signal cable to the port on the ELU.b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU

port on the CMUEA.2. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure

3-106.

a. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the door status sensor.b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on the

CMUEA.

Figure 3-106 Installing signal cables in the battery cabinet



----End


3.10.1 Installing the BBU CaseThis section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in anAPM30H or TMC11H.




404


ContextTwo BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the

BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.l When a second BBU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that the second BBU

be installed right above or below the original BBU without removing the guide rails.

Figure 3-107 shows the position for installing the BBU case in the APM30H and TMC11H.

Figure 3-107 Position for installing the BBU case

ProcedureStep 1 Optional: Remove the filler module from the position where the BBU case is to be installed, as

shown in Figure 3-108. If no filler module is installed in this position, skip this step.1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting ear on each

side of the filler module.2. Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.

NOTE

Install removed filler modules in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top to bottom. Redundantfiller modules can be discarded.

Figure 3-108 Removing the filler module




405

Step 2 Record the ESN on the BBU case and report it to the base station commissioning personnel. Fordetails, see Obtaining the ESN.

Step 3 Install cable claws on the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-109.1. Align the two cable claws with the holes on either side of the BBU case.2. Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw with a torque of 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 3-109 Installing cable claws on the BBU

Step 4 Install the BBU case, as shown in Figure 3-110.1. Place the BBU on the guide rails and slowly slide the BBU into the cabinet.2. Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ears on either side of the BBU to 2 N·m (17.70

lbf·in.).

Figure 3-110 Installing the BBU case

Step 5 Install the BBU power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-111.1. Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructions

in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.




406

NOTE




CAUTIONWhen installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connectthe BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the EPU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.

NOTE

Figure 3-111 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30H. When the BBU case is installed in a TMC11H, thecable connections are the same.







407

NOTE




CAUTIONWhen installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connectthe BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequencemay cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.

NOTE

Figure 3-112 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC11H. When the BBU case is installed in an extensionTMC11H, the cable connections are the same.





408



----End


Context

NOTE










409












410
















411

3.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12BThis section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the DCDU-12B.


Context

When RFUs and RRUs are configured in the BTS3900A, a DCDU-12B must be installed in theRFC to supply power to RRUs.

Figure 3-118 shows the position of the DCDU-12B in the RFC.

Figure 3-118 Position of the DCDU-12B

Table 3-18 lists the specifications of DCDU-12B power cables in AC and DC scenarios.

Table 3-18 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables

Cable Color



Connector


Connector


DCDU-12Binputpowercable(in AC

RTN(+)

Black

25 mm2 or0.039 in2,one group

OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)

RFC2terminal onthe EPU intheAPM30H




412

Cable Color



Connector


Connector


scenarios)

NEG(-)

Blue

DCDU-12Binputpowercable(in DCscenarios)

RTN(+)

Black

l 35mm2 or0.054in.2(lowsmokezerohalogen), onegroup

l 16mm2 or0.025in2, twogroups

OTterminal(M6)




NEG(-)

Blue

Procedure

Step 1 Remove the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B.

Step 2 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 3-119.1. Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears

on the DCDU-12B contact the columns.2. Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as





413

Figure 3-119 Installing the DCDU-12B

(1) DCDU-12B (2) Cable claw

Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-120. Skip thisstep in DC scenarios.1. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For details, see Assembling the OT

Terminal and the Power Cable.2. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal RFC2

on the EPU in the APM30H.3. Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the





414

Figure 3-120 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in AC scenarios

Step 4 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-121.1. Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For how to add a connector to the power

cable on the DCDU-12B side, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. Thetype of the connector at the other end depends on the onsite conditions.

2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cable to external power equipment.3. Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the





415

Figure 3-121 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in DC scenarios

Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind the cables.


----End

3.10.4 Installing the Air BaffleIn an APM30H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.B), air baffle must be installed in the vacant customerspace to prevent heat reflux in the empty space. If the vacant space in an APM30H(Ver.C)/TMC11H(Ver.C) has been occupied by air baffle, skip this section.

Procedure

Step 1 Place the air baffle in the installation position, and secure the air baffle to the right inner wall ofthe cabinet, as shown in the following figure.




416

Figure 3-122 Installing the filler module

----End


3.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.B)This section describes the changes of power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables,transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between cabinets duringthe upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).

Power Cables, PGND Cables, and Equipotential CablesTable 3-19 lists the changes of power cables, PGND cables, and equipotential cables.




417

Table 3-19 Changes of power cables, PGND cables, and Equipotential cables

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd






OTterminal(M6)

ACINPUT porton theEPS



OTterminal(M6)





To bereused, andtheconnector atoneendneedsto bereplacedonsite.


TMCport ontheEPS

OTterminal(M6, 4mm2

or0.006in.2)


EPC4connector

LOAD7 porton theEPU


or0.006in.2)





418

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Powercablefor thejunction boxin theTMC11H

To bereused


or0.002in.2)



or0.002in.2)

L andNterminalsneartheACOUTPUTparton thejunctionbox intheTMC11H


or0.002in.2)



or0.002in.2)

L andNterminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart onthejunction boxin theTMC11H

Inputpowercablefor theTMC11H(whentheTMC11HusesDCpowersupplied bytheRFCcabinet)


Parallelterminal

SPARE2port ontheDCDU-01


or0.004in.2)


OTterminal(M6)



or0.039in.2)





419

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd








OTterminal(M6,16mm2

or0.025in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-01



OTterminal (M6,onegroupofcableswith across-sectional areaof 35mm2

or0.054in2, ortwogroupsofcableswith across-sectional areaof 16mm2

or0.025in2)





420

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd





To bereplaced

Powerseries120connector(blue)

Powerseries120connector(blue)on theEPS

OTterminal

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUT parton theDCDU-01

OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal

DCDU-12Ain theRFC

RRUpowercable

To bereused(1)


One ofLOAD8 toLOAD13portson theEPS


- EPC5orEPC4connector



PWRport ontheRRU

Inputpowercablefor theheater(in ACscenarios)

To bereused


or0.002in.2)

L1 andN1terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart ontheEPS

C13connector



or0.002in.2)

L1 andN1terminalsnearthe ACOUTPUTpart ontheEPS

C13connector





421

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Powercablesfor abatterycabinet


Powerseries120connector(grey)

Powerseries120connector(grey)on theEPS

OTterminal(M6,16mm2

or0.025in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalson theBATin thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200DorIBBS200T


or 0.05in.2)



or 0.05in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminals ontheBATin thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T

Powercablesfor thefan inanIBBS200D



LOAD3 porton theEPS intheAPM30H


or0.004in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalson thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D

EPC4connector


EPC4connector

FAN/TEC_INPUTport onthepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200D




422

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Powercablefor theheating filmin theIBBS200D

To bereused


or0.002in.2)



or0.002in.2)

L andNterminalson thejunctionboxfor theheating filmin theIBBS200D


or 0.05in.2)



or0.002in.2)

L andNterminals onthejunction boxfor theheating filmin theIBBS200D

Powercablefor theTECin theIBBS200T



LOAD3 porton theEPS


or0.004in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheFANsilkscreenon thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T

EPC4connector

LOAD8 porton theEPU

EPC4connector

FAN/TEC_INPUTport onthepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T

Equipotential cable

To bereused

OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)





423

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




PGNDcable

To bereused

OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


NOTE




Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




MonitoringsignalcablebetweencascadedCMUEAs

Tobereused

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport ontheupper-levelCMUA

RJ45connector

COM_INport onthelower-levelCMUA

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport ontheupper-levelCMUEA

RJ45connector

COM_INport onthelower-levelCMUEA




424

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Monitoringsignalcablefor abatterycabinet

Tobereused

RJ45connector

COM_INport ontheCMUA intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

COM_INport ontheCMUEA intheIBBS200D orIBBS200T

RJ45connector





425

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




CMUA-BBUmonitoringsignalcable

Tobereused

RJ45connector

l COM_INport ontheCMUAintheRFC

l COM_INport ontheCMUAintheAPM30H

RJ45connector



RJ45connector



RJ45connector

l MON0port ontheUPEUintheBBUintheRFC





426

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd





Tobereused

DLCconnector


DLCconnector



DLCconnector


DLCconnector



BBUalarmcable

Tobereused

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

Externalalarmdevice

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

Externalalarmdevice


Tobereused

DB15maleconnector



DGLUb ontheDCTB

DB15maleconnector



DGLUb ontheDCTB




427

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd





Tobereused

Barewire



Barewire



Adapterused forlocalmaintenance

Tobereused

USB3.0connector


Ethernetconnector

Ethernetcable

USB3.0connector


Ethernetconnector

Ethernetcable


Table 3-21 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End




E1/T1cable

To bereused

DB26 maleconnector

OUTSIDE porton the UELP inthe SLPU

Depending onthe externaltransmissionequipment


FE/GEEthernet cables

To bereused

RJ45 connector FE electricalport in theOUTSIDE parton the UFLP inthe SLPU





428

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End





To bereused



l FCconnector

l SCconnector

l LCconnector



To bereused

DB25connector

INSIDE porton the UELP inthe SLPU

DB26connector

E1/T1 port onthe GTMU,WMPT,UMPT, orUTRP in theBBU


To bereused





To bereused






429

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End





To bereused



CPRIelectricalcables

To bereused

SFP20 maleconnector




SFP20 maleconnector







Cable ChangeType

Connectorat One End





Antennafeeder






430

Cable ChangeType

Connectorat One End








RX_INBport on anRFU


Installing Input Power Cable for the APM30HThe input power cable for the APM30H connects the external power equipment to the inputwiring terminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the cabinets in the BTS3900A.







The cabinets used by the BTS3900A in AC scenarios support the power supplies of 220 V ACthree-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire. Table 3-23 lists the inputpower cables that are delivered for the APM30H supplied with different type of power.



Remarks

Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V AC three-phase power

L1wire



l Preparedonsite

l Black cablewith dualinsulation




431


Remarks

L2wire

layers andfour corewires



L3wire



Nwire



Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V ACsingle-phasepower



l Preparedonsite


Nwire



Input powercable for theAPM30Hsupplied with110 V AC dual-live-wire power

L1wire



l Preparedonsite


L2wire



Nwire



Procedure

Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the APM30H.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add an OT terminal to each end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling

the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the APM30H, as shown in Figure 3-123, Figure 3-124, orFigure 3-125.




432



NOTE


3. Route the power cable into the cabinet along the left side, connect each wire to thecorresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 4.8 N·m (42.48lbf·in.).


Figure 3-123 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V ACthree-phase)





433

Figure 3-124 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V ACsingle-phase)




434

Figure 3-125 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (110 V ACdual-live-wire)




----End


The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H include the input power cable for theTMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed powerfrom the APM30H into the TMC11H and other equipment. You need to reuse the power cablesfrom the APM30H to the TMC11H with replacing the connectors at both ends.







435









Input powercable for theTMC11H

RTN(+)wire


To be reused, andthe connectors atboth ends need tobe replaced.

NEG(-)wire

Blue EPC4 connector OT terminal(M6, 4 mm2 or0.006 in.2)

Power cablefor thejunction boxin theTMC11H

L wire Brown

OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002in.2)


To be reused

N wire Blue OT terminal (M4,1.5 mm2 or 0.002in.2)


Procedure

Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in theTMC11H.


2. Add a connector to each end of the input power cable for the TMC11H and the power cablefor the junction box in the TMC11H according to the instructions in Table 1. For details,see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connectorand the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-126.

1. Remove the protective cover from the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.

2. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminalLOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30H.

3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminalsto 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).




436



Step 3 Install the power cable for the junction box of the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-127.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L3 and N3 terminals in the junction

box of the APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the AC input terminals L and N in the junction

box of the TMC11H.




437

Figure 3-127 Installing power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H




----End

Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the RFCsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from theAPM30H to the RFCs.






438





Table 3-25 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs.

Table 3-25 Power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs


Remarks

Input powercable for theRFC(between theAPM30Hand the RFCright belowtheAPM30H)

RTN(+)wire



Cables arenewlydelivered.

NEG(-)wire

Blue

Input powercable for theRFC(between theAPM30Hand the RFCon the lowerright side)

RTN(+)wire




NEG(-)wire

Blue

Procedure

Step 1 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC right below theAPM30H), as shown in Figure 3-128.1. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the RFC1 port on the EPU in the

APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals on the DCDU-12A in the RFC.




439


Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower rightside), as shown in Figure 3-129.1. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the RFC2 port on the EPU in the

APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals on the DCDU-12A in the RFC.




440





----End

Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (OneIBBS200D or IBBS200T Configured)

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from theAPM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T when one IBBS200D or IBBS200T is configured inthe initial configuration.






441





– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Table 3-26 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Table 3-26 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T


Remarks

Power cablesfor the fan inanIBBS200D

RTN(+)wire


NEG(-)wire

Blue


RTN(+)wire


NEG(-)wire

Blue

Power cablefor a batterycabinet

RTN(+)wire



Prepared onsite

NEG(-)wire

Black

Power cablefor theheating filmin theIBBS200D

L wire Brown



To be reused

Nwire

Blue




442

Procedure







Step 2 Install the power cable for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 3-130.

1. Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreenon the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Figure 3-130 Installing the power cable for the battery cabinet

Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 3-131.

NOTE





443



Figure 3-131 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly in the IBBS200D

Step 4 Install the power cable for the heating film in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 3-132.

NOTE



2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D.




444


NOTICEWhen installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do notconnect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 3-133.

l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.

l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from thetop, not from the bottom.





445

Step 5 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 3-134.

NOTE




Figure 3-134 Installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T


NOTE






446


----End

Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts(Two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts Configured)

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from theAPM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts when two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts are configuredin the initial configuration.










Table 3-27 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.

Table 3-27 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts


Remarks

Power cablefor the fanassembly intheIBBS200D

RTN(+)wire


NEG(-)wire

Blue

Cascadingpower cablefor the fanassembly intheIBBS200D

RTN(+)wire


(-)wire

Blue




447


Remarks


RTN(+)wire


NEG(-)wire

Blue

Cascadingpower cablefor the TECin theIBBS200T

RTN(+)wire


(-)wire

Blue

Power cablefor batteries

RTN(+)wire



Prepared onsite

NEG(-)wire

Black

Cascadingpower cablefor thebatteries

RTN(+)wire



Prepared onsite

NEG(-)wire

Black

Power cable(two wires)for theheating filmin theIBBS200D

L wire Brown



To be reused

Nwire

Blue

Procedure









448


Step 2 Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P1 in Figure 3-135.1. Connect the OT terminal (M8) at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen

on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals near the BAT silkscreen in the lower part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Step 3 Install cascading power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-135.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring

terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the upper part of the power distribution box in thelower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)wiring terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution boxin the upper IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Figure 3-135 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the storage batteries

Step 4 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure 3-136.

NOTE





449


2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/TEC silkscreen on the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

Step 5 Install the cascading power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure3-136.

NOTE




Figure 3-136 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the fan in theIBBS200D

Step 6 Install the power cable for the heating film in the upper IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure3-137.

NOTE





450


2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the upper IBBS200D.

Step 7 Install the power cable for the heating film in the lower IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure3-137.

NOTE



2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in thejunction box on the inner left wall of the lower IBBS200D.





451

NOTICEWhen installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do notconnect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 3-138.l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from the

top, not from the bottom.


Step 8 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P1 in Figure 5.

NOTE



2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the FAN/TEC port near theINPUT silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

Step 9 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-139.

NOTE







452

Figure 3-139 Installing the power cable and cascading power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T


NOTE




----End





453




Contextl The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length

requirements of the new RRU.

l The colors and structures of the power cables are for reference only, which may differ fromthose of the cables onsite.





l Table 3-28 lists the specifications of RRU power cables when a DCDU-12B suppliespower.



RRUpowercable

RTN(+)





NEG(-)

Blue




454

Procedure

Step 1 Route the RRU power cable into the cabinet through the cable hole.





contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m(10.62 lbf·in.).


4. Install the PGND cables with the ground clips onto the two self-clinching studs on the right

wall of the RFC. Then tighten the self-clinching studs to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).








455






----End





456

Installing Input Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theRFC and TMC11H when -48 V DC power is supplied.









As listed in Table 3-29, power cables for the RFC have two specifications: 35 mm2 (0.05 in.2)and 16 mm2 (0.02 in.2).

Table 3-29 Input power cables for the RFC


Remarks


(35 mm2 or0.05 in.2, onegroup)

RTN(+)wire




NEG(-) wire

Blue


(16 mm2 or0.02 in.2, twogroups)

RTN(+)wire


NEG(-) wire

Blue

Input powercable for theTMC11H(theTMC11H ispowered bythe RFC)

RTN(+)wire




NEG(-) wire

Blue




457

Procedure

Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the RFC.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cable for the RFC according to Table 1.

For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-142.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals

in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the external power supply.


Step 3 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-143.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals

in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the input power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG

(-) terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.




458





----End







459







l Table 3-30 lists the specifications of the RRU power cable when a DCDU-12B suppliespower.



RRUpowercable

RTN(+)





NEG(-)

Blue

NOTE

If the RRU is to be placed at a longer distance, replace the original RRU power cable with a longerone.

Procedure

Step 1 Route an RRU power cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.




460





contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

NOTE

When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules:

l When one to three RRU power cables are installed, put all the RRU power cables on one side of theground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in Figure 3-144.

l When four or six RRU power cables are installed, put two or three RRU power cables on each side ofthe ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in Figure 3-144.

l When five RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread three cablesthrough one ground clip and two cables through the other group clip, or thread four cables throughone ground clip or one cable through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 3 in Figure3-144.

l When seven to ten RRU power cables or twelve RRU power cables are installed, use two ground clipsand comply with the preceding rules.

l When eleven RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread fivecables through one ground clip and six cables through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration4 in Figure 3-144.

Figure 3-144 Installing the ground clips (side elevation view)




461

Figure 3-145 Installing the ground clips









462





----End


Installing the E1/T1 CableThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the E1/T1 cable.



– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the

E1/T1 cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in the APM30Hthat is shown in Figure 3-147.




463

Procedure

Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on the UELP, as shown in Figure3-147.

NOTE




Figure 3-147 Installing the E1/T1 cable

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable outlet on the bottom left side of thecabinet.



----End

Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable.






464

– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l An FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable.l When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the

FE/GE Ethernet cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing inthe APM30H that is shown in Figure 3-149.

Procedure

Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.

Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE cable in a proper position within 1 m from the cable outletof the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-148.1. Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE cable, and strip the sheath off the cable

for about 40 mm to expose the shield layer.2. Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.3. Make the shield layer of the FE/GE cable in full contact with the ground clip, and tighten

the M4 screws on the clip until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 N·m.

Figure 3-148 Installing a grounding clip

Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) portnear the OUTSIDE label on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 3-149.




465

NOTE




Figure 3-149 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable

Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.



----End

Installing the FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable.







466

l Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeledas MM.

l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multi-mode opticalmodule is black or gray.

l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.

l An FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SCconnector, or LC connector at the other end.

l SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are notused simultaneously.

l SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they arenot used simultaneously.

l The method of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H is the same as the methodof installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in a TMC11H. The following describes the procedurefor installing an FE/GE fiber optic cable in an APM30H.

NOTICEAn optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore,you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes.

Procedure

Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 3-150.

1. Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the correspondingBBU board.

2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.

3. Lower the puller on the optical module.

4. Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.






467

Step 2 Insert the optical module into the corresponding FE/GE optical port, as shown in Figure3-151.

NOTE




Step 3 Stick a temporary label to the FE/GE fiber optic cable to be installed.

Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in Figure3-151.

Figure 3-151 Installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable

Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.


Step 7 Replace the temporary label on the FE/GE fiber optic cable with an engineering label. Fordetailed operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End






468




l Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring ofthe cabinet. Table 3-31 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between twocabinets after the cable changes.

Table 3-31 Specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 APM30H





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure



APM30H.




469



----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200TThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.







470

Table 3-32 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Batterycabinetmonitoringsignal cable(between theIBBS200DorIBBS200TandAPM30H)

RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure



APM30H.




471


Step 2 Install a battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T andAPM30H), as shown in Figure 3-154.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the





472

Figure 3-154 Installing the battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200Dor IBBS200T and APM30H)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.







473






RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure



APM30H.




474








475

Figure 3-156 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC11H and RFC)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H.







476

Table 3-34 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure



APM30H.




477


Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T andAPM30H), as shown in Figure 3-158.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the





478

Figure 3-158 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet







479



----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.







480

Table 3-35 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure



APM30H.




481








482

Figure 3-161 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between theupper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)






483

Figure 3-162 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower batterycabinet and the APM30H)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.







484

Table 3-36 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure





485

1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly ofthe RFC.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of theAPM30H.








486

Figure 3-164 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)






487

Figure 3-165 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lowerbattery cabinet and the APM30H)







488



----End



Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H.







489

Table 3-37 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 TMC11H





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To bereused

Procedure



TMC11H.




490



----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs.

ContextMonitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of thecabinet. Table 3-38 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinetsafter the cable change.




491






RJ45connector


RJ45connector

MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUof theTMC11H

To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theextensionTMC11Hand RFC)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe extensionTMC11H

RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure



TMC11H.




492



of the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly





493

Figure 3-169 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe extension TMC11H and RFC)


----End

Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between twocabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.







494






RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To bereused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweentheextensionTMC11Hand RFC)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA intheextensionTMC11H

RJ45connector


To bereused


RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe rightRFC

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on theCMUEA inthe left RFC

To bereused

Procedure



TMC11H.




495



of the right RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly





496

Figure 3-171 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe extension TMC11H and RFC)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between two RFCs), as shownin Figure 3-172.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly

of the left RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly

of the right RFC.




497



----End

3.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal CablesThis section describes the procedure for installing inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or single-mode base station.











498



ContextThe following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBUsignal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU SignalCable Connections.


InterconnectionMode


BBU 0 BBU 1




NOTE







499


InterconnectionMode


BBU 0 BBU 1




UMPT+UMPT CI port on the UMPT CI port on the UMPT

NOTICEA color-coding tape marked Master is attached to one end of an inter-BBU cable that connectstwo UMPTs in different BBUs. When installing the cable, connect the end marked Master tothe CI port on the UMPT in BBU 0 and the other end to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 1.

NOTE



Procedure

Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the opticalmodules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.1. Lower the puller of the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the port.3. Raise the puller of the optical module.





500




NOTE




1.


NOTE

l When two BBUs are installed in the APM30H, connect the signal cables, as shown in Figure 3-176. WhenBBU 0 is installed in the APM30H and BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H, connect the signal cables, asshown in Figure 3-177.







501





502




----End



Procedure





503





NOTE





504





Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumper according to the instructions in Attaching the Color Ring.


----End

3.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical CableThe CPRI electrical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RFU.




505

Procedure


NOTE





Step 2 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cable through the cable hole on the inner left side ofthe power cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the correspondingRFU, as shown in Figure 3-182.

Figure 3-182 Installing the CPRI electrical cable

Step 3 Connect the SFP connector on the CPRI electrical cable to the CPRI0 port on the panel of theRFU, as shown in Figure 3-182.

Step 4 Route the cables by referring to Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind the cables.

NOTE

l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cable at the top of the DCDU-12A in the RFC or in thebase of the RFC.

l Lay out the cable according to the manners in Figure 3-182. Ensure that the cable is routed to the RFUthrough the cable bridge above the RFUs.




506

Step 5 Attach labels to the installed cables. For details, see Attaching an L-Shaped Label.

----End

3.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic CableThe CPRI fiber optic cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RRU.

Contextl Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeled

as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multi-mode optical

module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.l For details about the connections of CPRI fiber optic cables, see "CPRI Cable Connections"

in the BTS900A Hardware Description.

NOTICEThe performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes maybe abnormal. Therefore, you must insert an fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical modulewithin 20 minutes.



Station Cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 3-183.1. Lower the puller on the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU/WBBP/LBBP. Then insert an

optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU.

NOTE






507


Step 2 Install a CPRI fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 3-184.1. Stick a temporary label to the CPRI fiber optic cable to be installed.2. Remove the dustproof cap from the connector on the fiber optic cable.3. Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into

the optical modules in the WBBPLBBPGTMU, WBBP, or LBBPGTMU or WBBP, andthen insert the DLC connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical modulein the RF module.

NOTICEl When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the break-out fiber optic



Figure 3-184 Installing the CPRI fiber optic cable

Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cable along the left of the cabinet, and then lead it out of the cabinetfrom the cable hole on the left of the bottom. For details, see Cabling Requirements.




508

Step 4 Replace the temporary label on the CPRI fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End




No. Item







Installation Environment ChecklistTable 3-43 describes the installation environment checklist.


No. Item




Electrical Connection ChecklistTable 3-44 describes the electrical connection checklist.




509


No. Item














Cable Installation ChecklistTable 3-45 describes the cable installation checklist.


No. Item





510

No. Item









Checklist for the Hardware UpgradeTable 3-46 describes the checklist for the hardware upgrade.




511


No.

Cabinet Type Item

1 APM30H/TMC11H

The ground cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 3.6.5 Replacing the Power System.

2 APM30H/TMC11H


3 APM30H/TMC11H

The ELU has been replaced, For detailed operations, see 3.7.4Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

4 APM30H The input power cable for the APM30H has been replaced. Fordetailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cable for theAPM30H.

5 APM30H The input power cable for the junction box has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

6 APM30H The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

7 APM30H The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

8 APM30H The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 3.10.1 Installingthe BBU Case.

9 APM30H The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.


11 APM30H The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

12 TMC11H The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

13 TMC11H The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 3.7.6 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

14 TMC11H The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 3.10.1 Installingthe BBU Case.




512

No.

Cabinet Type Item

15 TMC11H The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.


17 TMC11H The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 3.7.6 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

18 RFC The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 3.8.3Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

19 RFC The monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor,monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, and ELU signalcable have been installed. For detailed operations, see 3.8.7Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

20 RFC In DC scenarios, the junction box has been installed. For detailedoperations, see 3.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC JunctionBox.

21 RFC In AC scenarios, the input power cable for the RFC has beenreplaced. For detailed operations, see Installing Power Cablesfrom the APM30H to the RFCs.

22 RFC The shield layer of the RRU power cable has been grounded. Fordetailed operations, see (Optional) Installing the RRU PowerCable or (Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable.

23 IBBS200D/IBBS200T

The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 3.9.3Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.








513

l All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.l All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been set to OFF.l All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T have

been set to OFF.l Switch on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T has been set to OFF.l Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.l Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.

Context



BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU for

maintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.




514


BaseStation


BTS3900A(Ver.B)







BTS3900A(Ver.C)










515

BaseStation


BTS3900A(Ver.D)





NOTE






516






517






Cabinet Component





Fanassembly





IBBS200DorIBBS200T













518


Cabinet Component


















NOTE






519






units.







replace the board.




520


















521


Cabinet Component
























units.




522








replace the board.








----End




523




Procedure







----End

3.14.2 Sealing the Cable OutletsAfter all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable outlets on the cabinet and base.




524

Procedure

Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes on both sides of the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC,IBBS200T, or IBBS200D cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 3-188 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, IBBS200T, orIBBS200D cabinet

(1) Fireproof mud

Step 2 Seal the RF cable holes in the RFC, as shown in the following figure.1. Route the cables through the corresponding cable holes, and install the cable outlet module

on the bottom of the cabinet.2. Use rubber caps to seal the unused cable holes in the cable outlet module.3. Tighten the screw on the cable outlet module.




525







(6) Screw - -

Step 3 Use baffle plates to block redundant space in the cable outlets and tighten the two screws oneach baffle plate, as shown in Figure 3-190.

Figure 3-190 Sealing the cable outlets on the base

(1) Baffle plate on the right (2) Baffle plate at the rear (3) Baffle plate on the left

Step 4 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in Figure 3-191.




526

Figure 3-191 Sealing cable outlets on the base using fireproof mud

(1) Fireproof mud (2) PVC corrugated pipe

Step 5 Tighten the three screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate.

----End


PrerequisitesBefore repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to Table 3-53.





Procedure






527










528


NOTE


----End




529

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A2)

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A(Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).

4.1 Introduction to UpgradeThis section describes configuration of enhanced cabinets after being upgraded and reuseprocedures.






4.7 Restructuring the IBBS200TThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200Tto be restructured.

4.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable


4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A(Ver.D_A2)


530

A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure propergrounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinetsto ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.









531


4.1.1 Restrcutured Cabinets InteriorTo meet requirements in different outdoor environments, Huawei provides various cabinets forthe separated macro base station such as BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) and distributed base stationsuch as DBS3900 (Ver.D_A2). The cabinets include the APM30H (Ver.D_A2), TMC11H(Ver.D_A2), RFC (Ver.D_A), and IBBS200T (Ver.D_A2), which provide different functions.The RFC is used only for the BTS3900A.

APM30H interiorThe following figure shows the APM30H interior.

Figure 4-1 APM30H interior

The following table describes the components in the APM30H.




532

Table 4-1 Components in the APM30H

No.

Component

OptionalorMandatory

MaximumQuantity inaSingleCabinet

Description

1 Heatexchanger core

Mandatory

1 The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer aircirculation, and exchanges internal and external air. In thisway, it lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet andprotects the cabinet from dust.

2 Fanassembly

Mandatory

1 A fan assembly is configured with fans and a centralmonitoring unit type EA (CMUEA), dissipating heat from thecabinet.

3 SLPU Mandatory

2 l To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal lightningprotection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and installed in thetop 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with theuniversal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) oruniversal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP).

l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU isoptional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. Itis configured with two universal signal lightningprotection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.

4 ELU Mandatory

1 The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet typeautomatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

5 Doorstatussensor

Mandatory

1 It reports the door status, whether open or closed.

6 EPU Mandatory

1 The Embedded Power subrack Unit (EPU) converts ACpower into DC power and feeds power to the devices insidethe cabinet. The EPU consists of the EPU subrack, PMU, andPSUs.

7 BBU3900

Mandatory

2 The BBU3900 processes the baseband signals and enablesthe base station and the base station controller to interact.

8 GATM Optional

2 The GSM Antenna and TMA Control module (GATM)reports the RET control signal alarms.




533

No.

Component

OptionalorMandatory

MaximumQuantity inaSingleCabinet

Description

9 EMUA Optional

1 An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) monitorsthe environment in a cabinet and processes alarms.

10 ACheater

Optional

1 The AC heater ensures that components in the cabinet workwithin the acceptable temperature range when thesurrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 Uspace at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater andan SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U spaceabove the SOU.

11 SOU Optional

1 The SOU can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom ofthe cabinet, transferring AC power supply to the customerequipment.

TMC11H InteriorThere are two types of TMC11H:l One type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown

in illustration A in the following figure.l The other type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration

B in the following figure.




534

Figure 4-2 TMC11H interior

The following table describes the components in the TMC11H.




535

Table 4-2 Components in the TMC11H

No.

Component

OptionalorMandatory

MaximumQuantityin aSingleCabinet

Description

1 Heatexchanger core

Mandatory

1 The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer aircirculation, and exchanges internal and external air. In thisway, it lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet andprotects the cabinet from dust.

2 Fanassembly

Mandatory

1 A fan assembly is configured with fans and a centralmonitoring unit type EA (CMUEA), dissipating heat fromthe cabinet.

3 SLPU Mandatory

2 l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU ismandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of thecabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP.

l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPUis optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU.It is configured with two USLP2s.

4 ELU Mandatory

1 The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet typeautomatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

5 Doorstatussensor

Mandatory

1 It reports the door status, whether open or closed.

6 DCDU Mandatory

1 The direct current distribution unit (DCDU) is 1 U high andit provides ten DC power outputs for components in theTMC. The DCDU-12B is used for the DC-powereddistributed base stations. The DCDU-12C is used for theDC-powered macro base stations and transmission cabinets.

7 BBU3900

Mandatory

2 The BBU3900 processes the baseband signals and enablesthe base station and the base station controller to interact.

8 EMUA Optional

1 An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) monitorsthe environment in a cabinet and processes alarms. TheEMUA must be configured when more than 16 Booleanalarm inputs are required. It is installed in the 1 U spacebelow the BBU.




536

No.

Component

OptionalorMandatory


Description

9 ACheater

Optional

1 The AC heater ensures that components in the cabinet workwithin the acceptable temperature range when thesurrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1U space at the bottom of the cabinet.

RFC Interior

The Radio Frequency Cabinet (RFC) is used by the BTS3900A and provides installation spacefor RFUs.

The following figure shows the RFC interior.

Figure 4-3 RFC interior

The following table describes the components in the RFC.




537

Table 4-3 Components in the RFC

No. Module/Board

OptionalorMandatory

MaximumQuantityin a SingleCabinet

Description

1 CMUEAassembly

Mandatory

1 The Central Monitoring Unit type EA(CMUEA) assembly consists of the supportand CMUEA.

2 DCDU-13A

Mandatory

2 The DCDU-13A is a direct currentdistribution unit. It provides four 30 A and-48 V DC power outputs.

3 ELUassembly

Mandatory

1 The ELU assembly consists of a supportand an electronic label unit (ELU). TheELU automatically reports the cabinet type.

4 Fanassembly

Mandatory

2 A fan assembly dissipates heat from thecabinet. It contains two standalone fans.

5 RFUs Mandatory

6 Radio frequency units (RFUs) are used inmacro base stations. They performmodulation and demodulation of basebandsignals and RF signals, data processing,power amplifying, and VSWR test.

IBBS200T InteriorThe following figure shows the IBBS200T interior.




538

Figure 4-4 IBBS200T interior

The following table describes the components in the IBBS200T.

Table 4-4 Components in the IBBS200T

No. Module/Board

OptionalorMandatory


Description

1 TEC Mandatory

1 The TEC cooler ensures the normaloperation of the IBBS200T in high-temperature areas and dissipates heat forthe storage batteries.

2 Transferterminalfor thesignalcable

Mandatory

1 It provides ports for alarms reported by thedoor status sensor, TEC, temperaturesensor for storage batteries, and smokesensor.

3 Powerdistribution box

Mandatory

1 The power distribution box is installed onthe lower inner right wall of the cabinet. Ittransfers and distributes power to the fan orTEC and storage batteries.

4 Storagebattery

Mandatory

8 The storage batteries provide long-durationbackup power for base stations.




539

No. Module/Board

OptionalorMandatory


Description

5 Transferterminalfor theinputpowercable forthe TEC

Mandatory

1 It provides power input ports for the TEC.

4.1.2 Restructuring ProcessThis section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade from BTS3900A(Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).

Restructuring Process in AC ScenariosThe following figure shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site suppliedwith AC power.




540


Restructuring Process in DC ScenariosFigure 4-6 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied withDC power.




541




You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:

l Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properlybefore the upgrade.




542

l Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need tocontact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.







4.2.3 Document PreparationsThis section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.


– BTS3900A (Ver.A) Hardware Description

– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description

– APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide

– BTS3900A&DBS3900 Post-Upgrade Hardware Description

– BTS3900A (Ver.A) Installation Guide

– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide

– BTS3900A (Ver.A) Site Maintenance Guide

– Safety Precautionsl During the installation, refer to the following document:





Diagonal pliers




543








Gloves - -






544




ContextNOTE






Procedure


If... Then...


Go to Step 2.




If... Then...







545

If... Then...



If... Then...






----End








546


No. Component

Change Type

Description



2 PMU To bereplaced

-

3 Fanassembly

To bereplaced


4 PSU (AC/DC)

To bereplaced


5 Door statussensor

To bereused

-

6 Powersubrack(AC/DC)

To bereplaced

The power subrack (AC/DC) needs to be replaced withan EPU 05 to meet the power requirement of a largeconfiguration.

7 PDU To bereplaced




547

No. Component

Change Type

Description


-

9 GATM To beremoved

-

10 EMUA To bereused

The environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA)monitors the environment in a cabinet and processesalarms. The EMUA must be configured when more than16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. It is installed in the1 U space below the BBU.

- AC heater To bereused

-

- SLPU Added An SLPU can be added according to customerrequirements.

- ELU Added The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be added to facilitate troubleshooting.






548

No. Cable One End The Other End Change Type

Connector


Connector


P0 PGNDcable forthe frontdoor

OTterminal

Groundpoint onthe innerwall of theAPM30H

OTterminal

Front doorof theAPM30H

To bereplaced

P1 GATMpowercable

- - - - To beremoved

P2 GATMpowercable


P3 EMUApowercable

OTterminal

LOAD3terminal onthe PDU intheAPM30H

Cord endterminal


To bereused

P4 HEUApowercable

OTterminal


3V3connector

PWR1 porton theHEUA

To bereplaced

P5 BBUpowercable

OTterminal


3V3connector

-48V porton the BBU

To bereplaced





549


No. Cable One End The Other End ChangeType



S0 Monitoringsignal cablefor theIBBS200T

OT terminal Junctionterminal forthemonitoringsignal cablein theIBBS200T

RJ45connector

HPMI in theAPM30H

To bereused

S1 HPMI-PMUmonitoringsignal cable


S2 PMU-HEUAmonitoringsignal cable





550




S3 HEUA-GATM1monitoringsignal cable


S4 GATM0-BBUmonitoringsignal cable


S5 FMUA-GATM0monitoringsignal cable





DB9 maleconnector


RJ45connector

RS232/RS422 porton the PMU

To bereused


Type Nfemaleconnector

GPS surgeprotector

SMA maleconnector

GPS port onthe USCU inthe BBU

To bereused

S9 GPS jumper N50 straightmaleconnector

GPS surgeprotector

N50 straightmaleconnector

GPSantenna

To bereused

4.4.2 Replacing the Front DoorThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door.


Procedure





551


Step 2 Set the SW4 circuit breaker on the PDU to OFF. This circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fan assembly.

NOTE

l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the DBS3900, the SW2 circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fans.

l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the BTS3900A, the SW4 circuit breaker controls the power supplyto the fans.

Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door from the fan transferboard, and then cut the cable ties on these cables.

Figure 4-10 Removing the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door

Step 4 Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown inFigure 4-11.




552

Figure 4-11 Removing the equipotential cable for the cabinet door

Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove three hinges on the cabinet door and then remove thecabinet door, as shown in Figure 4-12.



NOTE

l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.

l Two persons are required for installing the front door.

1. One person lifts the new front door to align the hinges with the holes in the cabinet, andthe other person uses a torque screwdriver to tighten the three hinges to the cabinet to 1.4N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).




553

2. Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on the inner wall.

Step 7 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and that the barcodenumber starts with 212102.

l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Figure 4-13 shows the positionof the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of the cabinet.

l If there is no such a barcode label on the inner wall of the cabinet, record the number on thebarcode label that is stuck on the front door, and stick a label carrying the same number tothe corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Figure 4-13 shows the positionof the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.


(1) Position of the barcode label on the inner wall of thecabinet



----End


Prerequisites

The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aflat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Procedure





554



NOTE




1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables. Attach temporarylabels at one end of all cables before removing them for recording cable connections.

2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fanassembly, and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shownin the following figure.

NOTE

When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan assembly.


3. Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.

Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears of the fan assembly to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).




555



----End

4.4.4 Installing an ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the electronic label unit(ELU).


Procedure



Step 2 Use two M4x8 screws to secure the ELU on the ELU base to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Step 3 Remove the adhesive paper off the bottom of the ELU base, and stick the ELU base on theposition shown in the following figure.

NOTE

Press the ELU for about 1 minute to ensure that it is securely stuck on the inner wall of the cabinet.




556

Figure 4-16 Installing the ELU base

Step 4 Install the ELU case.


----End



Contextl Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.l The following figure shows the power systems before and after the upgrade. A shows the

exterior of the power subrack without the cover before the upgrade. B shows the exteriorof the power subrack after the upgrade.




557

Figure 4-17 Power systems before and after the upgrade

(1) PMU (2) PSU (3) PDU (4) Power subrack

Procedure



Step 2 Instruct the element management system (EMS) administrator to block all the carriers of thisbase station.

Step 3 Power off the base station.

1. Set the Bat circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.

2. Shut off the external power for the APM30H.

Step 4 Remove all cables from the power system.

1. Remove all monitoring signal cables from the PMU.

2. Remove power cables for storage batteries from the BAT(+) and BAT(-) terminals on thewiring unit of the power subrack.

3. Remove all cables from the PDU panel. The cables include the PGND cable, AC inputpower cables, AC and DC output power cables, and AC and DC surge protection signalcables.

Step 5 Remove the power system.

1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to loosen the screws on the ejector lever of the PMU or PSUpanel.

2. Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU or PSU out of the subrack and remove the PMUor PSU from the subrack, as shown in the following figure.




558

Figure 4-18 Removing the PMU or PSU

3. Remove the screws on both sides of the power subrack (AC/DC), and gently pull the power

subrack (AC/DC) out of the cabinet.4. Remove the screws on both sides of the PDU, and gently pull the PDU out of the cabinet.5. Place the removed AC or DC power subrack, PMU, PSUs, and PDU into the ESD box or

bag.

Step 6 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left side of thecabinet

CAUTIONIf the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC(35.6oF to 37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperaturealarms.

1. Remove the guide rails in the positions shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-19 Removing the guide rails




559

2. Remove the guide rail on the left side of the position where the power subrack is originally

installed, as shown by a in the following figure. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve thescrews.

3. Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mountingbar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton paddingcontacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in the following figure.

4. Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 6.2 to secure the guide rail attached with windproofcotton padding, and tighten the screws to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown by c in thefollowing figure.

Figure 4-20 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the innerleft side of the cabinet


padding for about 3 cm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in the following figure.2. Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completely

strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of thecabinet. These operations are shown by b and c in the following figure.




560


Step 8 Install the mounting part attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of thecabinet

CAUTIONIf the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC(35.6oF to 37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperaturealarms.

1. Remove the M6 screw at the bottom of the right mounting bar.2. Attach the windproof cotton padding to the inner right wall of the cabinet, use three M6

screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as shown in the followingfigure.




561

Figure 4-22 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right side of the cabinet

Step 9 Install the new power system.

1. Add six floating nuts to the mounting bars for securing the power system. The followingfigure shows the positions.

Figure 4-23 Installing floating nuts




562

2. Place the new power system in the installation position and gently push it into the cabinetalong the guide rails. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven M6x12 panel screws to2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).

3. Use M6x12 screws to secure the PGND cable for the new power system to the ground bar.The recommended torque is 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

----End


Contextl The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured along with DRFUs. When DRFUs are removed,

the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.l If the BTS3900A has two GATMs, remove the upper one before the lower one.

Procedurel Remove the GATM.

1. Turn off the SW0 or SW1 circuit breaker on the PDU to power off the GATM.2. Remove the monitoring signal cable from the GATM panel.3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the PGND cable for the GATM. Then use a

wrench to remove the RF jumper from the GATM.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, and remove

the GATM. Reinstall the removed screws on their original positions on the mountingbar, as shown in the following figure.





563

l Remove the Bias-Tee.

1. Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable, and PGND cable from theBias-Tee.


----End

4.4.7 (Optional) Installing the Filler ModuleIn an APM30H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.B), filler modules must be installed in the vacantcustomer space to prevent heat reflux in the empty space. If the vacant space in an APM30H(Ver.C)/TMC11H(Ver.C) has been occupied by filler modules, skip this section.

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver.

Procedure

Step 1 Install the filler module in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to the secure thefiller module to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 4-25.


----End

4.4.8 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30H afterrestructuring the APM30H.

Prerequisites

The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and a pair of ESD gloves.

Context

The following table describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.




564

Table 4-6 Power cables in the restructured cabinet

Cable One End The Other End Description



Power cablefor thetransferterminal

Bare wire Transferterminal

OT terminal AC INPUTterminal onthe EPU

To be reused


EPC4connector


3V3connector



EMUApower cable

EPC4connector


Cord endterminal



BBU powercable

EPC4connector


3V3connector



The following table describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.






2-pinconnector

GATE porton the PMU


To be reused

ELU signalcable

RJ45connector

ELU RJ45connector


Added




565







4-pinconnector


Added


RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEA inthe fanassembly

RJ45connector


Added

PMU-CMUEAmonitoringsignal cable

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on thefan assemblyin theAPM30H

Added


DB9 maleconnector


RJ45connector




Remove related cables in the cabinet according to the cable changes in 4.4.1 InformationYou Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H. Skip this step if you haveremoved these cables when replacing related modules.

l Installing power cables in the APM30H

1. Install the power transfer cable for the APM30H, as shown by P1 in Figure 4-26.

a. Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the AC OUTPUT porton the left side of EPU.

b. Connect the cable at the other end of the power cable to the transfer terminal.



b. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable for the fan assemblyto the LOAD2 port on the EPU.




566

c. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the fan assembly in the APM30H, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten thescrews on the 3V3 connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).



b. Add a connector to each end of the power cable and you can use the EPC4connector removed in 3.1. For detailed operations, see Assembling the Cord EndTerminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and thePower Cable.

c. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD5 porton the EPU.

d. Connect the cord end terminal at the other end of the power cable to the PWR1port on the EMUA.



b. Add the removed EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable. Fordetailed operations, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

NOTE


c. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V porton the UPEU in the BBU, and connect the EPC4 connector at the other end tothe LOAD0 port on the panel of the EPU.





567

5. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cableties to bind them.


l Install signal cables in the APM30H.1. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S1 in Figure

4-27.

a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to theGATE port on the fan assembly.

b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the door status sensor.


a. Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU.

b. Connect the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU port on the fanassembly.

3. Install the monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front door, as shown byS3 in Figure 4-27.

a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the frontdoor to the power cable for the fan in the front door.

b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal transfercable to the FAN_EXT port on the fan assembly.

NOTICEBind the interconnected monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front doorto the cable bridge on the front door to prevent the cabinet door from extruding theinterconnection terminal.


a. Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_OUTport on the fan assembly.

b. Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1port on the UPEU in the BBU.


a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signalcable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoringsignal cable to the COM_IN port on the PMU.

6. Optional: Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S6 in Figure4-27.

a. Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the EMUA monitoring signalcable to the RS485 port on the EMUA.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the EMUA monitoring signalcable to the COM_OUT port on the PMU.




568




----End


4.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theTMC11H

This section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of theTMC11H.

Component Changes in the TMC11H

There are three types of TMC11Hs:

l When a TMC11H serves as a transmission cabinet, it only provides space for thetransmission equipment and a DCDU-03A is installed in it. Illustration A in the followingfigure shows this type of TMC11H.

l When a TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the DBS3900, the TMC11H is suppliedwith -48 V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-03B are installed in it. Illustration Bin the following figure shows this type of TMC11H.




569

l When a TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, the TMC11H is suppliedwith -48 V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-06A are installed in it. Illustration Cin the following figure shows this type of TMC11H.


No. Component

Change Type

Description



2 Fanassembly

To bereplaced


3 DCDU To bereplaced

l When the TMC11H serves as a transmission cabinet,the DCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12C.

l When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet ofthe DBS3900, the DCDU needs to be replaced with aDCDU-12B.

l When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet ofthe BTS3900A, the DCDU needs to be replaced witha DCDU-12C.




570

No. Component

Change Type

Description

4 Door statussensor

To bereused

-


-

6 GATM To beremoved

-

7 EMUA To bereused

-

- ELU Added The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needsto be added to facilitate troubleshooting.

Cable Changes in the TMC11HCable connections in TMC11Hs vary according to the configurations of TMC11Hs. Thefollowing figure shows the cable changes in the TMC11H serving as the power cabinet of theBTS3900A.

Figure 4-29 Equipotential cables and power cables in the TMC11H




571

No. Cable Connector at OneEnd


Connector at theOtherEnd


ChangeType


OTterminal

Groundpoint onthe innerwall of theTMC11H

OTterminal

Front doorof theTMC11H

To bereplaced

P1 Powercable forthe fan intheTMC11H

OTterminal

l FANterminal ontheDCDU-06A

l LOAD8terminal ontheDCDU-03A

l LOAD8terminal ontheDCDU-03B

3V3connector

PWR porton the fanassemblyin theTMC11H

To bereplaced




572





ChangeType

P2 BBUpowercable

OTterminal

l BBUterminal ontheDCDU-06A



3V3connector

-48V porton theUPEU inthe BBU

To bereplaced

P3 EMUApowercable

OTterminal

l SPARE3terminal ontheDCDU-06A



Cord endterminal

PWR1terminalon theEMUA

To bereused




573





ChangeType

P4 GATMpowercable


Figure 4-30 shows the signal cable changes in the TMC11H that houses the BBU3900 and issupplied with -48 V DC power.

Figure 4-30 Signal cable changes in the TMC11H





ChangeType


2-pinconnector

GATEport on theHPMI

Bare wire Doorstatussensor

To bereused




574





ChangeType

S2 l DCDU-06Amonitoringsignalcable

l DCDU-03Amonitoringsignalcable

l DCDU-03Bmonitoringsignalcable



DB9 maleconnector

RS485port on theEMUA

RJ45connector

COM_OUT port onthe HEUA

To bereused

S4 GATM-BBUmonitoring signalcable


S5 FMUA-GATMmonitoring signalcable


S6 HEUA-BBUmonitoring signalcable



SMA maleconnector

GPS porton theUSCU inthe BBU


GPS surgeprotector

To bereused




575





ChangeType

S8 GPSjumper

N50straightmaleconnector

GPS surgeprotector


GPSantenna

To bereused



ContextThe TMC11H and APM30Hs have the same front door. This section describes the procedurefor replacing the cabinet door, using the APM30H as an example.

Procedure



Step 2 Set the circuit breaker corresponding to the fans on the DCDU to OFF to power off the fans.l When the TMC11 or TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-06A, the SW3 circuit breaker

controls the power supply to the fans.l When the TMC11 or TMC11H is configured with a DCDU-03A or DCDU-03B, the SW0

circuit breaker controls the power supply to the fans.

Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door from the fan transferboard, and then cut the cable ties on these cables.




576

Figure 4-31 Removing the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door



Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove three hinges on the cabinet door and then remove thecabinet door, as shown in Figure 4-33.




577



NOTE

l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.

l Two persons are required for installing the front door.

1. One person lifts the new front door to align the hinges with the holes in the cabinet, andthe other person uses a torque screwdriver to tighten the three hinges to the cabinet to 1.4N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).


Step 7 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and that the barcodenumber starts with 212102.l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Figure 4-34 shows the position

of the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of the cabinet.l If there is no such a barcode label on the inner wall of the cabinet, record the number on the

barcode label that is stuck on the front door, and stick a label carrying the same number tothe corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Figure 4-34 shows the positionof the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.




578





----End


Prerequisites


Context

The fan assembly used in a TMC11H is the same as that used in an APM30H. This sectiondescribes the procedure for removing the front door in an APM30H as an example.

Procedure






579




Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.1. Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables. Attach temporary

labels at one end of all cables before removing them for recording cable connections.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fan

assembly, and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shownin the following figure.

NOTE

When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan assembly.


3. Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.

Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears of the fan assembly to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).




580



----End

4.5.4 Installing an ELUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the electronic label unit(ELU).

Prerequisites


Context

This section describes the procedure for installing the ELU in an APM30H as an example. Theposition of and procedure for installing an ELU in a TMC11H is the same as those in anAPM30H.

Procedure






581

Step 2 Use two M4x8 screws to secure the ELU on the ELU base to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Step 3 Remove the adhesive paper off the bottom of the ELU base, and stick the ELU base on theposition shown in the following figure.

NOTE

Press the ELU for about 1 minute to ensure that it is securely stuck on the inner wall of the cabinet.

Figure 4-37 Installing the ELU base

Step 4 Install the ELU case.


----End

4.5.5 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-03A, DCDU-03B,or DCDU-06A.





582

ContextTMC11Hs can be configured with different models of DCDUs, which include the DCDU-03A,DCDU-03B, and DCDU-06A. The DCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12B orDCDU-12C during the upgrade.l When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, replace the DCDU with

a DCDU-12C.l When the TMC11H serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900, replace the DCDU with

a DCDU-12B.l When the TMC11H serves as a transmission cabinet of the BTS3900A or DBS3900, replace

the DCDU with a DCDU-12C.This section describes the procedure for replacing the DCDU-03B with a DCDU-12B. Othermodels of DCDUs are removed and installed in the same way.

ProcedureStep 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.


Step 2 Shut off the external power supply to the power off the DCDU-03B.NOTE

l If a DCDU-03A is configured, you can turn the SW6 circuit breaker on the PDU in the APM30H to OFF topower off the DCDU-03A.

l If a DCDU-06A configured, shut off the external power supply to power off the DCDU-06A.

Step 3 Remove the DCDU-03B, as shown in Figure 4-38.1. Remove all connectors from the DCDU-03B panel.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal

block from the DCDU-03B.




583

3. Remove the input power cables and equipotential cable for the DCDU-03B from the

terminals.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-03B,

and gently pull the DCDU-03B out of the cabinet along the guide rails.

Figure 4-38 Removing the DCDU-03B

Step 4 Place the DCDU-03B and protective cover into the ESD box or bag.

Step 5 Install the DCDU-12C.1. Hold the DCDU-12C with both hands and slide the DCDU-12C into the cabinet until the

mounting ears on the DCDU-12C contact the columns.2. Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12C to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).


----End



Procedure





584


----End

4.5.7 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC11H afteryou restructure the TMC11H.








Description


EPC4connector


3V3connector



BBU powercable

EPC4connector


3V3connector



EMUApower cable

EPC4connector


Cord endterminal







585






Description




To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

ELU signalcable

RJ45connector

ELU RJ45connector





Power cablefor the fan inthe frontdoor of theTMC11H

4-pinconnector




DB9 maleconnector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedurel Install power cables in the TMC11H.

1. Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the TMC11H, as shown by P1 in Figure4-40.

a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD9 porton the DCDU-12C.

b. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the fan assembly.

2. Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 4-40. If no BBUis installed in this cabinet, skip this step.


b. Connect the EPC4connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 orLOAD7 port on the DCDU-12C.

c. Connect the 3V3 power connector at the other end of the power cable to the -48Vport on the UPEU in the BBU.





586

a. Replace the OT terminal at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4connector, as described in Table 4-8. For details about how to replace theterminals, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD8 porton the DCDU-12C.

c. Connect the cord end terminal at the other end of the power cable to the PWR1port on the EMUA.

Figure 4-40 Installing power cables in the TMC11H



l Install signal cables in the TMC11H.


a. Cut off the 2-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable, and stripthe jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.

b. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on the fanassembly.

2. Optional: Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S2 inFigure 4-41. If no BBU is installed in this cabinet, skip this step.

a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to theCOM_IN port on the CMUEA.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.





587

a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the port on the topof the ELU.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the ELU porton the fan assembly.

4. Install the monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front door, as shown byS4 in Figure 4-41.


b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the signal cable to the FAN_EXTport on the fan assembly.


a. Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the signal cable to the RS485 porton the EMUA.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.

Figure 4-41 Installing signal cables in the TMC11H

6. Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable

ties to bind them.7. Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End





588


Component Changes in the RFC

Figure 4-42 shows component changes in the RFC.


No. Component

Change Type

Description

1 FMUA To bereplaced

The FMUA needs to be replaced with a CMUEAassembly.


The DCDU-02 needs to be replaced with a DCDU-13Ato enhance the power distribution capacity.

3 Filler panel To bereplaced

The filler panel needs to be replaced with an ELUassembly. The ELU reports the cabinet typeautomatically. It needs to be added to facilitatetroubleshooting.




589

No. Component

Change Type

Description

4 Door statussensor

To bereused

-

5 Fan To bereused

-

6 Temperature sensor

To bereused

-






590





ChangeType

P1 to P6 RFUpowercables

Parallelterminal

RFU0terminalon theDCDU-02

- - To bereplaced

P7 FMUApowercable

Parallelterminal

FMUAterminalon theDCDU-02

3V3connector

PWR porton theFMUA

To bereplaced






591





ChangeType

S1 DCDU-FMUAmonitoring signalcable

Cord endterminal

TEM_HUMARRESTER

RJ45connector

SPD ALMport on theDCDU-02

To bereplaced

S2 and S3 FMUA-FANmonitoring signalcable

4-pinconnector

FAN porton theFMUA

- FAN unit To bereplaced


2-pinconnector

GATEport on theCMUA


To bereused

S5 Monitoring signalcable forthetemperature sensor inthe RFC

4-pinconnector

TEM porton the fanassemblyin the RFC

Temperature sensor

Air intakevent at thebottom ofthe RFC

To bereplaced



a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.l The FMUA is removed, and the fan assembly stops working.

Procedure





592


Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fan assembly,and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shown in the followingfigure.


Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown in the followingfigure. The recommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).

Figure 4-45 Replacing the fan assembly in the RFC


----End

4.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler PanelThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the FMUA assembly andfiller panel.

Prerequisites

The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, aPhillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.




593

Procedure



Step 2 Turn the FMUA circuit breaker on the left of the DCDU-02 panel to OFF.

Step 3 Record the cable connections on the FMUA panel, and remove all cables.

Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the FMUA, and gentlypull the FMUA out of the cabinet along the guide rails.

Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, andremove the filler panel.

Step 6 Place the removed FMUA assembly and filler panel into ESD boxes or bags.

Step 7 Place the CMUEA assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Usea torque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 4-46 Installing the CMUEA assembly

Step 8 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, and gentlypull the filler panel out of the cabinet.




594

Step 9 Place the ELU assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use atorque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 4-47 Installing the ELU assembly


----End

4.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-02 with aDCDU-13A.

Prerequisites


Procedure






595

Step 2 Instruct the M2000/U2000 administrator to block all the carriers of this base station.

Step 3 Turn all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU-02 to OFF to power off the fan assembly andRFUs.

Step 4 Power off the DCDU-02.l In AC scenarios, turn the SW8 and SW9 circuit breakers on the PDU in the APM30H to

OFF.l In DC scenarios, shut off the external power supply.

Step 5 Remove the two DCDU-02 units on the left and right, as shown in the following figure.1. Record the position of connectors on the DCDU-02, and remove the connectors.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminals

on the DCDU-02.3. Remove the input power cables and PGND cable from the DCDU-02.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-02, and

gently pull the DCDU-02 out of the cabinet along the guide rails.

Figure 4-48 Removing the DCDU-02 units

Step 6 Place the removed DCDU-02 units and protective covers in ESD boxes or bags.

Step 7 Place the DCDU-13A in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use a torquescrewdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the followingfigure.




596



----End

4.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the RFU.

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or ESDgloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.


V2, MRFU V2a, and WRFU.l RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU

V2, MRFU V2a WRFU, and LRFU.l RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU

V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU.l If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) or WRFUa is not faulty, disable its maximum output

power locking for TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.l Replacing an RFU interrupts services carried by the RFU.l Replacing an RFU takes about 6 to 10 minutes.l The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured along with DRFUs. When DRFUs are removed,

the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be removed. For details about how to remove theGATM and Bias-Tee, see 4.4.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.

l A handle is used during the replacement. The handle is placed on the lower left side of thedocument holder on the cabinet door, as shown in the following figure.




597


NOTE


Procedure


NOTE



1. Check the maximum output power has been locked for TX channels of the new RFU, andrecord the result.l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet

number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU. Run theDSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number,and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum output power forTX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has been locked.






598

If... Then...


Go to Step 1.2.


Go to 2.

NOTE



l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable themaximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to resetthe RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum outputpower of each RFU is set successfully.



NOTE


Step 2 Ask the administrator of element management system (EMS) to block the RFU.




NOTE









599

NOTE


Step 5 Remove the RFU to be replaced.1. Set the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to OFF to power off

the RFU.2. Label the power cable for the RFU to be replaced, and disconnect the cable.3. Label the RF jumper for the RFU to be replaced, loosen the DIN 7/16 male elbow connector

on the RF jumper, and disconnect the RF jumper.4. Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the cable.5. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws at the four corners of the RFU, and then





Step 6 Install the new RFU.1. Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the rails until it snaps into place.2. Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners on the RFU panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.) to

secure the RFU to the subrack.3. Reconnect power cable and RF jumper to the RFU panel.4. Use a wrench to tighten the connector on the jumper and feeder to 25 N·m to 35 N·m (221.25

lbf·in. to 309.75 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.




600

Figure 4-52 Tightening the connector on the jumper and feeder



----End

4.6.6 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC after yourestructure the RFC.








Description

CMUEApower cable

EPC4connector

LOAD3 porton the leftDCDU-13A

3V3connector






601





Description

Power cablebetweenDCDU-13As

OT terminal(M6)

RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals onthe leftDCDU-13Ain the RFC

OT terminal RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals onthe rightDCDU-13Ain the RFC


RFU powercable

EPC4connector

One of theLOAD0 toLOAD2ports on bothDCDU-13As

3V3connector









Description




To be reused

ELU signalcable

RJ45connector

ELU port onthe CMUEA

RJ45connector

ELU port onthe ELUassembly



4-pinconnector

TEM port onthe CMUEA

Temperaturesensor

Air intakevent at thebottom of theRFC


Surgeprotectionalarm cablefor theDCDU

Bare wire IN0 and IN1ports on theCMUEA

Bare wire DC ALARMport on theDCDU-13A





602





Description

Monitoringsignal cablefor the leftfan

- Cabledeliveredwith the fan

Bare wire EFAN1 andEFAN2 portson theCMUEAassembly

The cable isdeliveredwith the newfanassembly.

Monitoringsignal cablefor the rightfan


4-pinconnector

Transferterminal forthe CMUEAassembly



1. Install the CMUEA power cable, as shown by P1 in Figure 4-53.

a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD3 porton the left DCDU-13A.

b. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the CMUEA.

2. Optional: Install the power cable between DCDU-13As, as shown by P2 in Figure4-53. Skip this step in DC scenarios.

a. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals on the left DCDU-13A in the RFC.

b. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) andNEG(-) terminals on the right DCDU-13A in the RFC.


a. For RFU 0 to RFU 2, connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cableto one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the left DCDU-13A.

b. For RFU 3 to RFU 5, connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cableto one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the right DCDU-13A.

c. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the RFU.




603






a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the ELU port onthe ELU assembly.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the ELU porton the CMUEA.


a. Cut off the 2-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable, and stripa length of 8 mm (0.31 in.) jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.

b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on theCMUEA.

3. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown by S3 inFigure 4-54.

a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to thetemperature sensor near the air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.

b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEM port on the CMUEA.




604

4. Install the surge protection alarm cable for the left DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 inFigure 4-54.

a. Connect one end of the cable to the DC ALARM port on the DCDU-13A.

b. Connect the other end of the cable to the IN1 port on the CMUEA.

5. Install the surge protection alarm cable for the right DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 inFigure 4-54.



6. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan, as shown by S5 in Figure 4-54.

a. Connect the cables that come out of the left fan assembly to the EFAN1 andEFAN2 ports on the CMUEA.

b. Connect the cables that come out of the right fan assembly to the 4-pin terminalsthat come out of the CMUEA. Those 4-pin terminals have been connected to theIFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the rear of the CMUEA.






605


----End

4.7 Restructuring the IBBS200TThis chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200Tto be restructured.

4.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theIBBS200T

This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the IBBS200T.

Component Changes in the IBBS200T

Figure 4-55 shows component changes in the IBBS200T.

Figure 4-55 Components in the IBBS200T

No. Component

Change Type

Description

1 Storagebattery

To bereused

-




606

No. Component

Change Type

Description

2 Door statussensor

To bereused

-


To bereplaced


4 Transferterminal forthe inputpowercable forthe TEC

To bereused

-

- Transferterminal forthe signalcable

To bereused

-

Cable Changes in the IBBS200TFigure 4-56 shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the IBBS200T.





607


Connector


Connector



OTterminal

Groundpoint onthe frontdoor

OTterminal

Groundpoint onthe rack

To bereused

P1 RTN(+)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries

OTterminal

Positivepole forthe lowerstoragebatterygroup

OTterminal

Positivewiringterminalon thepowerdistribution box

To bereplaced

P2 RTN(+)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries

OTterminal

Positivepole forthe upperstoragebatterygroup

OTterminal

Positivewiringterminalon thepowerdistribution box

To bereplaced

P3 NEG(-)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries

OTterminal

Negativepole forthe upperstoragebatterygroup

OTterminal

Negativewiringterminalon thepowerdistribution box

To bereplaced

P4 NEG(-)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries

OTterminal

Negativepole forthe lowerstoragebatterygroup

OTterminal

Negativewiringterminalon thepowerdistribution box

To bereplaced

P5 Powertransfercable forthe TEC inthe frontdoor

- Transferterminalfor theinputpowercable forthe TEC

- TEC To bereplaced




608


Connector


Connector


P6 TECpowercable

Cord endterminal

Powerdistribution box

Cord endterminal

Wiringterminalon thefront door

To bereused






609


Connector


Connector



Bare wire Transferterminalfor thesignalcable


To bereused

S2 Monitoring signalcable forthetemperature sensor inthe batterycabinet

- Transferterminalfor thesignalcable

Cord endterminal

Temperature sensor

To bereused



DANGERWhen replacing batteries, prevent short circuits or reverse connections between the positive andnegative poles of the storage batteries. All tools used for installation must be insulated to preventthe batteries from burning and ensure personal safety.

Procedure






610

Step 2 Power off the battery cabinet.1. Set the SW2 circuit breaker on the PDU panel in the APM30H to OFF. This circuit breaker

controls the power supply to the TEC.2. Set the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers on the power distribution box to OFF.3. Set the BAT circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.

Step 3 Remove the storage batteries.1. Remove the terminal covers from the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 4-58.



the storage batteries and the copper bars between the storage batteries, and remove the inputpower cables and copper bars, as shown in Figure 4-59.



hands to remove the storage batteries at the same layer, and place the storage batteries at aproper place.




611

NOTE

l Remove the baffle plate and storage batteries layer by layer from top down. After removing thebaffle plate at a layer, you must remove all storage batteries at the layer before removing thebaffle plate at the lower layer.



Step 4 Remove the TEC power transfer cable from the TEC.

Step 5 Remove the power distribution box, as shown in the following figure.

1. Remove the two screws from the left cover of the power distribution box and remove thecover plate.

2. Remove the four screws, spring washers, and flat washers from the power distribution box.


3. Remove the power distribution box with the cables connected to it and then place them intothe ESD box or bag.

Step 6 Connect cables to the new power distribution box.

1. Remove the cover from the new power distribution box.

2. Connect cables to the power distribution box, and bind the cables inside the distributionbox, as shown in the following figure.




612

Figure 4-61 Connecting cables to the power distribution box





Step 7 Install the power distribution box in the battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-62.1. Place the new power distribution box in the battery cabinet.2. Adjust the position of the power distribution box until the holes at four corners of the power

distribution box align with the bolts in the cabinet.3. Use a socket wrench to secure the four nuts delivered with the power distribution box to

the bolts until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).4. Install the cover on the left side of the power distribution box and tighten the two M3x6

screws on the cover to 0.55 N·m (4.87 lbf·in.).




613


----End






614

ContextThe following table describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.






Description

Powertransfercable for theTEC

OT terminal Transferterminal forthe inputpower cablefor the TEC

OT terminal Powerdistributionbox


















Procedure

Step 1 Install the power transfer cable for the TEC as well as power cables between the powerdistribution box and the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.1. Connect the power transfer cable for the TEC to the power transfer terminal on the front

door, as shown by P1 in the following figure.2. Connect negative power cables and then positive power cables for the storage batteries.

The black cable is the power cable for the negative pole, and the red cable is the powercable for the positive pole, as shown by P2 and P3 in the following figure.




615

Figure 4-63 Installing power cables in the battery cabinet

Step 2 Install the storage batteries from bottom up and from left to right, as shown in the followingfigure.

NOTE

The storage batteries should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reserved betweenthe storage batteries.





616

Step 3 Install power cables for the storage batteries.

1. Remove the terminal covers from the batteries.2. Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for series connections, as

shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-65 Installing the power cables for the storage batteries

Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties tobind them.

Step 5 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

4.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential CableA PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure propergrounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinetsto ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.

Prerequisites

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a cable cutter, and a multi-purposecrimping tool.

Context

The principles for grounding a BTS3900A are as follows:l The upper and lower cabinets must be connected through an equipotential cable.

l The lower cabinets are connected to the RFC through an equipotential cable.




617

l The RFC is connected to the ground busbar through a PGND cable.

The principles for grounding a DBS3900 are as follows:l The upper and lower cabinets must be connected through an equipotential cable.l The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to other

lower cabinets through equipotential cables.l The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to an

external ground bar through a PGND cable.

The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable.

Table 4-13 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable

Cable Cross-Sectional Area ofthe Core Wire and Size ofthe OT Terminal

Color

PGND cable OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or0.025 in.2)

Green and yellow

Equipotentialcable

OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or0.025 in.2)

Procedure

Step 1 Prepare the PGND cable and equipotential cable.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling the

OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 4-67.1. Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar on the inner wall of the RFC, and

then use spring washers and screws to secure the OT terminals of the PGND cable.

NOTE

When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as shown inthe following figure.

Figure 4-66 Installing an OT terminal correctly

2. Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the external ground copper bar, as shown in

the following figure.




618

Figure 4-67 Installing a PGND cable

(1) Ground bar in the cabinet (2) PGND cable (3) Onsite ground bar

----End




619


4.9.1 Installing a BBU CaseThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in anAPM30H or TMC11H.


Context



l When a second BBU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that the second BBUbe installed right above or below the original BBU without removing the guide rails.

Figure 4-68 shows the positions for installing BBU cases in an APM30H and a TMC11H.

Figure 4-68 Positions for installing BBU cases

Procedure

Step 1 Record the electronic serial number (ESN) on the BBU case and report it to the base stationcommissioning personnel. For details, see Obtaining the ESN.

Step 2 Install cable claws on the BBU, as shown in Figure 4-69.

1. Align the two cable claws with the holes on both sides of the BBU case.

2. Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).




620

Figure 4-69 Installing cable claws on the BBU case

Step 3 Install the BBU case, as shown in Figure 4-70.

1. Place the BBU on the guide rails and gently push the BBU case into the cabinet.

2. Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ear on each side of the BBU case to 2 N·m(17.70 lbf·in.).

Figure 4-70 Installing a BBU case

Step 4 Install the BBU power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 4-71.


CAUTIONEnsure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connectedto the BBU first and then to the EPU. The operation in the reverse sequence may causepersonal injury or component damage.




621

NOTE




NOTE

Figure 4-71 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30H. When the BBU is installed in a TMC11H, the cableconnections are the same.








622

NOTE




CAUTIONEnsure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connected to theBBU first and then to the DCDU. The operation in the reverse sequence may cause personalinjury or component damage.

NOTE

Figure 4-72 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC11H. When the BBU is installed in an extensionTMC11H, the cable connections are the same.






623


----End


Context

NOTE










624












625
















626

4.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the outdoor distributionmodule 06D-2 (shortened to ODM) and outdoor fiber distribution 06 (shortened to OFD) on thetop or side of a cabinet.

Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a Phillips

screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nosepliers.

Contextl An ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed on one side of a single cabinet, or two

ODM or OFD mounting frames can be installed on one side of stacked cabinets or bothsides of a single cabinet. The ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed depending onsite space and the number of ODMs or OFDs to be installed.

l An ODM/OFD mounting frame or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are preferentiallyinstalled on the right side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets. If an ODM/OFD mountingframe or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are installed on the left side of a single cabinetor stacked cabinets, only one ODM or OFD can be installed one ODM/OFD mountingframe.

Figure 4-78 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with six or less RRUs configured)




627

Figure 4-79 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with 7 to 12 RRUs configured)

Procedurel Installing a mounting frame or two mounting frames on one side of a single cabinet

or mounting frames or both sides of a single cabinet1. Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following

figure.




628

Figure 4-80 Installing a mounting kit on the top

2. Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use a

torque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.


3. Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use two

M6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 N·m(344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.




629

Figure 4-82 Securing an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame to one side of the cabinet

4. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/

OFD06 mounting frame to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-83 Tightening an attachment plate on an ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame(1)

5. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the back of the cabinet base

to 5 N·m (344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.




630


6. Optional: If two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames need to be installed on bothsides of a single cabinet, the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed onthe other side of the cabinet according to Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5.

l Installing mounting frames on one side of stacked cabinets

1. Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the followingfigure.


2. Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use atorque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.




631


3. Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use twoM6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 N·m(344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.





632

4. Use two M6x14 screws to secure the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on

the installed ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame.5. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/


Figure 4-88 Tightening the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame and itsattachment plate (1)






633

Figure 4-89 Tightening the second attachment plate

l Installing the ODM06D or OFD06

1. Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D or OFD06 to 1.2N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.




634

Figure 4-90 Installing mounting ears

2. Place the ODM06D or OFD06 on the bulges of pre-securing parts on the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame, as shown in the following figure.

NOTE

l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the right side of the cabinet, theODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on one side or in the middle of the mounting frame.

l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the left side of the cabinet, the ODM06Dor OFD06 can be installed only in the middle of the mounting frame.

Figure 4-91 Pre-securing the ODM06D or OFD06

(1) Pre-securing part




635

3. Use four M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D or OFD06 onto the ODM06D/OFD06mounting frame to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.). This is a recommended tightening torque.

Figure 4-92 Securing the ODM06D or OFD06

----End

4.9.4 Installing the SLPUDuring the upgrade, if there is no vacant slot for installing a UELP or UFLP in the BBU case,an SLPU needs to be configured.

Prerequisites

The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and ESD gloves are available.

Context

The following figure shows the recommended position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 orAPM30H.

l When the SLPU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that SLPU be installed inthe top 1 U space in the APM30H.

l When the SLPU is installed in the APM30, it is recommended that SLPU be installed inthe 1 U space below the BBU in the APM30.




636

Figure 4-93 Position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 or APM30H

(1) Recommended position for installing the SLPU inan APM30

(2) Recommended position for installing the SLPU inan APM30H

Procedure

Step 1 Install cable claws on both sides of the SLPU case, and move the mounting ear on each side onehole backwards. Use four M4 screws to secure the mounting ears to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), asshown in Figure 4-94.

Figure 4-94 Installing a cable claw




637

Step 2 Slide the SLPU into the cabinet, and then use a screwdriver to tighten the two M6 screws on themounting ears of the SLPU to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 4-95.

Figure 4-95 Installing the SLPU

Step 3 Install the surge protection transfer cable, as shown in Figure 4-96.

NOTE

The following figure shows the connection of an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable and an E1/T1 cable inGSM mode. For the transmission cable connections in other modes, see "Transmission Cable Connections" inBTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description or DBS3900 Hardware Description.

Figure 4-96 Installing a surge protection transfer cable

(1) T1: E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable (1) T2: E1/T1 cable

Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties tobind them.


----End


4.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two CabinetsThis section describes the changes of power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables,transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).




638

Power Cables, PGND Cables, and Equipotential CablesThe following table lists the changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable.

Table 4-14 Changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable

Cable ChangeType

Before the Upgrade After the Upgrade

ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd





To bereplaced(newcables needto bepreparedonsite)

- - - - OTterminal(M6)





To bereused.Theconnector atoneendneedsto bereplaced.

- - - - EPC4connector

LOAD7porton theEPU


or0.006in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-12C




639

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Inputpowercablefor theTMC11H (inDCscenarios)





or0.039in.2)





640

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd






- - - - Dependingon thepowerequipment

Powerequipment

OTterminal (M6,agroupofcableswith across-sectional areaof 35mm2

[0.054in2] ortwogroupsofcableswith across-sectional areaof 16mm2

[0.025in2])

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-13A intheRFC




641

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd





To bereplaced



OTterminal

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-13A intheRFC

RRUpowercable

Added

- - - - EPC5orEPC4connector

A porton theODM

Dependingon theRRUmodel

PWRporton theRRU




642

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Mainpowercable

Added

- - - - Dependingon thepowerequipment

l ACscenarios:RFC2portontheEPUintheAPM30H

l DCscenarios:externalpowerequipment

Cordendterminal

Cordendterminal baron theODM




643

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Powercablefor theheaterin theTMC11H

To bereused

Barewire

8-pintransferterminal ontheinnerleftwall oftheAPM30H

Barewire

8-pintransferterminal ontheinnerleftwallof theTMC11H

- - - -

Powercablesfor thebatterycabinet


- - - - OTterminal (M8,35mm2

or0.054in.2)



or0.054in.2)

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheBATsilkscreen onthepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T




644

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Powercablesfor theTECin theIBBS200T



LOAD8porton theEPU

EPC4connector

FAN/TEC_INPUTporton thepowerdistributionbox intheIBBS200T

Equipotential cable

To bereused

OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


PGNDcable

To bereused

OTterminal(M6)

Ground barin thecabinet

OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


NOTE


Signal CablesThe following table lists the signal cable changes.




645


Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Monitoringsignalcablefor thebatterycabinet

Tobereused

Barewire

Signaltransferterminal baron thefrontdoor oftheIBBS200T

Barewire

HPMIin theAPM30H

Barewire

Signaltransferterminal baron thefrontdoor oftheIBBS200T

Barewire





646

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




HEUA-BBUmonitoringsignalcable

Tobereused

RJ45connector

COM_IN porton theHEUAin theAPM30H

RJ45connector

MON1 porton theUPEUin theBBUin theAPM30H

RJ45connector



RJ45connector






647

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Monitoringsignalcablefor thetransmissioncabinet

Tobereused

RJ45connector

COM_IN porton theHEUAin theTMC11H

RJ45connector

COM_OUTporton theFMUA intheRFC

RJ45connector

COM_IN porton thefanassembly intheTMC11H

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport ontheCMUEAassembly intheRFC

FMUA-BBUmonitoringsignalcable

Tobereused

RJ45connector

COM_IN porton theFMUA intheRFC

RJ45connector

MON0 porton theUPEUin theBBUin theAPM30H

RJ45connector

COM_IN porton theCMUEAassembly intheRFC

RJ45connector

MON0port ontheUPEUin theBBUin theAPM30H




648

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd





Tobereused

DLCconnector


DLCconnector

l CIportontheUMPTintheBBU

l S0portontheUCIUintheBBU

DLCconnector


DLCconnector



BBUalarmcable

Tobereused

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

Externalalarmdevice

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

Externalalarmdevice

Cablebetween twocombined basestations

Tobereused

DB15maleconnector



DGLUbporton theDCTB

DB15maleconnector



DGLUb porton theDCTB




649

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd





Tobereused

Barewire

SLPU Dependingon theexternalequipment


Barewire




Table 4-16 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI electrical cables

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End




E1/T1cable

To bereused

DB26 maleconnector

OUTSIDE porton the UELP



FE/GEEthernet cable

To bereused

RJ45 connector FE electricalport near theOUTSIDEsilkscreen onthe UFLP



To bereused



l FCconnector

l SCconnector

l LCconnector





650

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End





To bereused

DB25connector

INSIDE porton the UELP

DB26connector

E1/T1 port onthe GTMU,WMPT/UMPT,or UTRP in theBBU


To bereused





To bereused




To bereused






651

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End




CPRIelectrical cable

To bereused

SFP20 maleconnector




SFP20 maleconnector







Cable ChangeType

Connectorat One End





Antennafeeder







RX_INBport on theRFU





652

Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30H

Input power cables for the APM30H connect the external power equipment to the input wiringterminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the APM30H.






l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables arepurchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.


– The cables and connectors are provided by the customer.


An AC-powered BTS3900A supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110V AC dual-live-wire power supplies. To support different types of power supply, the APM30Hneeds to use different input power cables, as shown in Table 4-18.



Remarks

Input powercables for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V AC three-phase power

L1wire



l They need tobe preparedonsite.

l Black cablewith dualinsulationlayers andfour corewires

L2wire



L3wire



Nwire






653


Remarks

Input powercables for theAPM30Hsupplied with220 V ACsingle-phasepower





Nwire



Input powercables for theAPM30Hsupplied with110 V AC dual-live-wire power

L1wire





L2wire



Nwire



Procedure

Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the APM30H.

1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.

2. Add OT terminals to both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cables for the APM30H, as shown in Figure 4-97, Figure 4-98, or Figure4-99.



NOTE


3. Route the power cables into the cabinet along the left side of the cabinet interior, connecteach wire to the corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screwsto 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).




654


Figure 4-97 Installing input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC three-phase)





655

Figure 4-98 Installing input power cables for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC single-phase)




656

Figure 4-99 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (110 V AC dual-live-wire)


Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cables outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cablehole on the cabinet.


----End


Power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H feed power from the APM30H to allcomponents in the TMC11H. You need to replace the connectors at both ends of the powercables from the APM30H to the TMC11H to reuse the power cables.







657


may differ from those of the cables onsite.l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are

purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:





Cable WireColor

One End The Other End Remarks

Input powercables fortheTMC11H

RTN(+)wire


They can bereused and theirconnectors needto be replacedonsite.NEG

(-)wire

Blue OT terminal(M6, 4 mm2 or0.006 in.2)

Procedure

Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC11H.1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to each end of the input power cables for the TMC11H according to the

specifications in Table 4-19. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the PowerCable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install input power cables for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 4-100.1. Remove the protective cover from the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.2. Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cables to the

DC output port LOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30H.3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminalsto 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).





658

Figure 4-100 Installing input power cables for the TMC11H




----End

Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to RFCsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from theAPM30H to RFCs.






659


may differ from those of the cables onsite.l The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and regions. If cables are

purchased locally, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:



Table 4-20 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to RFCs.

Table 4-20 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to RFCs

Cable WireColor

One End The OtherEnd

Remarks

DCDU-13Apower cables

RTN(+)wire




NEG(-)wire

Blue

Power cablesbetweencascadedDCDU-13As

RTN(+)wire




NEG(-)wire

Blue

Procedure

Step 1 Install input power cables for the RFC (between the APM30H and the DCDU-13A on the innerleft wall of the RFC), as shown in Figure 4-101.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC1 terminals on the EPU

in the APM30H.

NOTE

If two RFCs are configured, connect the input power cables for the second RFC to the RFC2 terminals onthe EPU.

2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-13A on the inner left wall of the RFC.




660


Step 2 Install power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As (between the left and right DCDU-13As),as shown in Figure 4-102.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals on the left DCDU-13A.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals on the right DCDU-13A.




661

Figure 4-102 Installing power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As




----End

Install Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200T

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from theAPM30H to the IBBS200T.








662





Table 4-21 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the BBS200T.

Table 4-21 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200T

Cable WireColor


Remarks

Power cablesfor the TECin theIBBS200T

RTN(+)wire

Black EPC4 connector EPC4 connector They can bereused and theirconnectors needto be replacedonsite.NEG

(-)wire

Blue

Power cablesfor thebatterycabinet

RTN(+)wire



They aredelivered andtheir connectorsneed to be addedonsite.NEG

(-)wire

Black

Procedure

Step 1 Add connectors to the power cables to be installed according to the specifications in Table4-21.1. Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:

l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cablel Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable

Step 2 Install power cables for the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 4-103.1. Connect the OT terminals (M8) at one end of the power cables to the DC output terminals

near the BAT silkscreen on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box in theIBBS200T.




663

Figure 4-103 Installing power cables for the battery cabinet

Step 3 Install power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 4-104.

1. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cables to the DC output port LOAD8on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cables to the INPUT port nearthe FAN/TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.




664

Figure 4-104 Installing power cables for the TEC in the IBBS200T


NOTE

For easy maintenance of the power distribution box in the IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cables thatare routed in front of the power distribution box and do not bind these cables when routing them along the rightside of the IBBS200T interior.



----End

(Optional) Installing RRU Power CablesWhen an AC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables andmain power cables need to be installed onsite. RRU power cables feed power from the outdoordistribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the EPU in theAPM30H to the ODM.




665



Contextl This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The RRU power cables are

connected to the same positions and routed in the same way in a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).l The original RRU power cables can be reused only if they meet the power supply and length

requirements of the new RRUs.l The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which

may differ from those of the cables onsite.l Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the

RRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installationguide.

l The following table lists the specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables.

Table 4-22 Specifications of RRU power cables and main power cables


Mainpowercables

RTN(+)

Black Cord endterminal

OT terminal(M6)

They need to beprepared onsite.

NEG(-)

Blue

RRUpowercables

RTN(+)




NEG(-)

Blue

Procedure

Step 1 Add cord end terminals to RRU power cables on the ODM side according to the instructions inAssembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Use a T20 Torx screwdriver to loosen the six screws on the ODM06D-3 cover. Then open thecover, as shown in Figure 4-105.




666

Figure 4-105 Opening the ODM06D-3 cover

Step 3 Prepare cables according to the cabling label on the protective cover.

Step 4 Install the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection box,RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable in sequence, as shown in Figure 4-106.1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the cable clips.

NOTE

The screws on the cable clips can be adjusted to adapt to cables with different cross-sectional areas.

2. Partially loosen the PG connectors to route the cables through the PG connectors.3. Route the PGND cable for the surge protection box, power cable for the surge protection

box, RRU power cables, and surge protection alarm cable through the PG connectors insequence.

4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure the cord end terminals onto the terminal block.5. Use clips to secure the cables and tighten the screws on the clips to ensure that the clips

contact with the shield layers of the cables.6. Secure the PG connectors of the cables.

NOTICETighten the PG connectors to waterproof the device.




667

Figure 4-106 Installing the cables

(1) Surge protection alarm cable (2) RRU power cables

(3) Main power cables (4) PGND cable for the surge protection box

Step 5 Close the ODM06D-3 cover and use a T20 Torx screwdriver to secure the six screws on thecover, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-107 Closing the ODM06D-3 cover

Step 6 Connect main power cables to the EPU in the APM30H.




668

1. Add OT terminals to the main power cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe OT Terminal and the Power Cable.


Figure 4-108 Installing the main power cables




----End





669

Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theRFC when -48 V DC power is supplied.










Table 4-23 lists the specifications of input power cables for the RFC.

Table 4-23 Specifications of input power cables for the RFC

Cable WireColor


Remarks

Input powercables for theRFC

(16 mm2 or0.025 in.2,two groups)

RTN(+)wire


Depending onthe externalpowerequipment


NEG(-) wire

Blue

Procedure

Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the RFC.


2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the RFC according to Table 1.For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install input power cables for the RFC, as shown in Figure 4-109.

1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-13A in the RFC.

2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.




670





----End

Installing Input Power Cables for the TMC11H

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theTMC11H when -48 V DC power is supplied.






671





Table 4-24 lists the specifications of input power cables for the TMC11H.

Table 4-24 Input power cables for the TMC11H

Cable WireColor


Remarks

Input powercables for theTMC11H

(16 mm2 or0.025 in.2,one group)

RTN(+)wire




NEG(-) wire

Blue

Procedure

Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC11H.1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the TMC11H according to Table

4-24. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install input power cables for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 4-110.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.




672

Figure 4-110 Installing input power cables for the TMC11H




----End

(Optional) Installing RRU Power CablesWhen a DC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables andmain power cables need to be installed onsite. RRU power cables feed power from the outdoordistribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the external powerequipment to the ODM.






673







RRU. For details about how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the relatedRRU installation guide.




Mainpowercables

RTN(+)




NEG(-)

Blue

RRUpowercables

RTN(+)




NEG(-)

Blue

Procedure






674




NOTE










675






Step 6 Connect the connectors at one end of RRU power cables to RRUs.




676

Step 7 Connect main power cables to the external power equipment.

1. Add connectors to each end of the power cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.

2. Connect the cord end terminals at one end of power cables to the input ports on the ODM.

3. Connect the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.





----End





677

Installing E1/T1 CablesThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing E1/T1 cables.



– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l When a TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of

E1/T1 cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30H that is shown in Figure4-115.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cables to the OUTSIDE ports on the UELP, as shown in Figure4-115.

NOTE







678

Figure 4-115 Installing E1/T1 cables

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cables out of the cable hole on the bottom left side of thecabinet.



----End

Installing FE/GE Ethernet Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE Ethernet cables.







679

l FE/GE Ethernet cables are shielded straight-through cables.l When a TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of

FE/GE Ethernet cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30H that is shownin Figure 4-117.

Procedure

Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through a cable bag into the cabinet.

Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE Ethernet cables in a proper position within 1 m (3.28 ft) fromthe cable hole of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 4-116.1. Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE Ethernet cables, and strip a length of about

40 mm (1.57 in.) jacket from the cables to expose the shield layers2. Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through the

clip.3. Attach the ground clip to the shield layers of the FE/GE Ethernet cables and tighten the M4

screws on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (0.27 lbf·in.).


Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) portnear the OUTSIDE silkscreen on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 4-117.




680

NOTE




Figure 4-117 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables

Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.



----End




681

Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic CablesThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables.



– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is

labeled as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multimode optical

module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.l FE/GE fiber optic cables have an LC connector at one end and an FC, SC, or LC connector

at the other end.l SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on an LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, the two ports

cannot be used simultaneously.l SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, the two

ports cannot be used simultaneously.l This section uses the procedure for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H as

an example. The procedures for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H and aTMC11H are the same.

NOTICEThe performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes maybecome abnormal. Therefore, you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical modulewithin 20 minutes.

Procedure

Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 4-118.1. Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the corresponding

BBU board.2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.3. Lower the puller of the optical module.4. Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.5. Raise the puller of the optical module.




682


Step 2 Insert the optical modules into the corresponding FE/GE optical ports, as shown in Figure4-119.

NOTE




Step 3 Stick temporary labels to the FE/GE fiber optic cables to be installed.

Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables into the optical module, as shown in Figure4-119.




683

Figure 4-119 Installing FE/GE fiber optic cables

Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.


Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the FE/GE fiber optic cables with engineering labels. Fordetailed operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End






684


Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured, and the second BBU is installed

in the APM30H or TMC11H. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function.For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 4-26 lists the specifications of a monitoring signal cable betweentwo cabinets, which is installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.

Table 4-26 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H





RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC

RJ45connector

MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theAPM30H

To be reused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown inFigure 4-120.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the

APM30H.




685

Figure 4-120 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30H)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200TThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T.

Contextl In a triple-mode base station, two BBUs are configured. The second BBU does not perform

the monitoring function. For the monitoring scheme in this scenario, see MonitoringPrinciples.

l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. Table 4-27 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between twocabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.




686

Table 4-27 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablefor thebatterycabinet(between theIBBS200TandAPM30H)

Bare wire Signal cabletransferterminal onthe frontdoor of theIBBS200T

Bare wire l Doorstatussensor intheAPM30H

l SMOKEport onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H

l IN2 porton the fanassemblyin theAPM30H

l APM30H/PMU/"TEM_BAT"

To be reused

Procedure


APM30H.




687


Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the IBBS200T and APM30H),as shown in Figure 4-122.1. Connect one end of the cable to the signal junction terminal on the door of the IBBS200T.2. The cable has four pairs of wires at the other end, which are connected as follows:

l Connect the white and blue twisted pair cable to the IN2 port on the fan assembly in theAPM30H.

l Connect the white and brown twisted pair cable to the SMOKE port on the fan assemblyin the APM30H.

l Connect the white and orange twisted pair cable to the TEM_BAT port on the PMU inthe APM30H.

l Connect the white and green twisted pair cable to the door status sensor in the APM30H.Monitoring signal cables between the door status sensor and the GATE port on the PMUinside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the cabinets.




688

Figure 4-122 Installing a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between theIBBS200T and APM30H)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.







689






RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector

COM_INport on thefan assemblyin theTMC11H

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe RFC

To be reused

Procedure


APM30H.




690


Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),as shown in Figure 4-124.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly in

the TMC11H.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the

RFC.




691



----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T+1 TMC11HThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T+1 TMC11H.







692

Table 4-29 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200T+1 TMC11H





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused


RJ45connector

COM_INport on thefan assemblyin theTMC11H

RJ45connector


To be reused


Bare wire Signal cabletransferterminal onthe frontdoor of theIBBS200T

Bare wire l Doorstatussensor intheAPM30H

l SMOKEport onthe fanassemblyin theAPM30H

l IN2 porton the fanassemblyin theAPM30H

l TEM_BAT porton thePMU intheAPM30H

To be reused




693

Procedure


1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in theAPM30H.


Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet (between the IBBS200T and APM30H),as shown in Figure 4-126.

1. Connect one end of the cable to the signal junction terminal on the door of the IBBS200T.

2. The cable has four pairs of wires at the other end, which are connected as follows:

l Connect the white and blue twisted pair cable to the IN2 port on the fan assembly in theAPM30H.

l Connect the white and brown twisted pair cable to the SMOKE port on the fan assemblyin the APM30H.

l Connect the white and orange twisted pair cable to the TEM_BAT port on the PMU inthe APM30H.




694

l Connect the white and green twisted pair cable to the door status sensor in the APM30H.Monitoring signal cables between the door status sensor and the GATE port on the PMUinside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the cabinets.

Figure 4-126 Installing a monitoring signal cable for the battery cabinet

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),as shown in Figure 4-127.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly in

the TMC11H.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the RFC.




695



----End



Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H.






696


Table 4-30 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 TMC11H





RJ45connector


RJ45connector

MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU in theTMC11H

To bereused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown inFigure 4-128.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the

TMC11H.




697

Figure 4-128 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC11H)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs.

ContextMonitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of thecabinets. Table 4-31 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets,which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.




698






RJ45connector


RJ45connector

MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theTMC11H

To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theRFC andextensionTMC11H)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on thefan assemblyin theextensionTMC11H

RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure


TMC11H.




699


Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the RFC and extensionTMC11H), as shown in Figure 4-130.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly

in the extension TMC11H.




700

Figure 4-130 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe RFC and extension TMC11H)


----End

Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11HsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.







701






RJ45connector


RJ45connector

MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU in theTMC11H

To bereused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweenthe RFC andextensionTMC11H)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on thefanassembly intheextensionTMC11H

RJ45connector


To bereused


RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe rightRFC

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe left RFC

To bereused

Procedure


TMC11H.




702


Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the RFC and extensionTMC11H), as shown in Figure 4-132.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the right

RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly

in the extension TMC11H.




703

Figure 4-132 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe RFC and extension TMC11H)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between two RFCs), as shownin Figure 4-133.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the left

RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the

right RFC.




704



----End

4.10.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal CablesThis section describes how to install inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or single-mode basestation.










705




Context



InterconnectionMode


BBU 0 BBU 1




NOTE



Procedure

Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the opticalmodules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.




706

1. Lower the puller of the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the port.3. Raise the puller of the optical module.





NOTE




1.





707

NOTE

l When both BBUs are installed in an APM30H, install inter-BBU signal cables, as shown in Figure 4-137.When BBU 0 and BBU 1 are installed in an APM30H and a TMC11H, respectively, install inter-BBU signalcables, as shown in Figure 4-138.




Figure 4-137 Installing inter-BBU signal cables (1)




708




----End


Prerequisites

The following tools and materials are available: a cable cutter, PVC insulation tape, and an open-end wrench or torque wrench.

Procedure





709





NOTE





710





Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumpers according to the instructions in Attaching the ColorRing.


----End




711

4.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical CablesCPRI electrical cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RFUs.

Procedure

Step 1 Remove dustproof bags from the connectors at both ends of the CPRI electrical cables.


NOTE





Step 3 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cables through the cable holes on the left side of thepower cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the correspondingRFUs, as shown in Figure 4-143.

Figure 4-143 Installing CPRI electrical cables

Step 4 Connect the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables to the CPRI0 ports on thepanels of the RFUs, as shown in Figure 4-143.




712


NOTE

l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cables at the top of the DCDU-13A in the RFC or inthe base of the RFC.

l Lay out the cables according to the manners in Figure 4-143. Ensure that the cables are routed to the RFUsthrough the cable bridge above the RFUs.


----End

4.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic CablesCPRI fiber optic cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RRUs.

Contextl This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The CPRI fiber optic cables are

connected to the same positions and routed in the same way in a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is

labeled as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical

module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.




Station Cables.l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing

CPRI Cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 4-144.1. Lower the puller of the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP. Then insert

an optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on theRF module.




713

NOTE


3. Raise the puller of the optical module.


Step 2 Install CPRI fiber optic cables, as shown in Figure 4-145 and Figure 4-146.1. Stick temporary labels to the CPRI fiber optic cables to be installed.2. Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors on the fiber optic cables.3. Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into

the optical modules in the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP, and then insert the DLC connectorslabeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module in the RF module.

NOTICEl When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout fiber optic







714

Figure 4-146 Installing CPRI fiber optic cables

Step 3 Route CPRI fiber optic cables out of the cabinet from the cable hole on the left bottom. Fordetails about how to route the cables, see Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Replace the temporary labels on the CPRI fiber optic cables with engineering labels. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End






715


No. Item







Installation Environment Checklist

Table 4-35 describes the installation environment checklist.


No. Item




Electrical Connection Checklist

Table 4-36 describes the electrical connection checklist.


No. Item







716

No. Item











Cable Installation Checklist

Table 4-37 describes the cable installation checklist.


No. Item









717

No. Item





Checklist for the Hardware Upgrade

Table 4-38 describes the checklist for the hardware upgrade.


No.

Cabinet Item

1 APM30H orTMC11H


2 APM30H orTMC11H

The ELU has been installed. For detailed operations, see 4.4.4Installing an ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

3 APM30H orTMC11H

The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 4.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

4 APM30H orTMC11H

The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 4.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.




718

No.

Cabinet Item

5 APM30H orTMC11H

The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 4.4.8 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

6 APM30H orTMC11H

The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 4.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 4.9.1 Installing aBBU Case.

7 APM30H orTMC11H

The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 4.4.8 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

8 APM30H The input power cable for the APM30H has been replaced. Fordetailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cables for theAPM30H.

9 APM30H The power transfer cable for the APM30H has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 4.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

10 APM30H The PGND cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 4.4.5 Replacing the Power System.



13 RFC The ELU assembly has been installed. For detailed operations, see4.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel. Ensurethat all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. Anincorrect or faulty ELU may cause problems in heat dissipationor monitoring.

14 RFC The monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor,monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, ELU signalcable, and monitoring signal cable for the fan have been installed.For detailed operations, see 4.6.6 Installing Cables in theCabinet.

15 RFC The input power cable for the RFC has been replaced. For detailedoperations, see Installing Power Cables from the APM30H toRFCs or Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC.

16 - The shield layer of the RRU power cable has been grounded. Fordetailed operations, see (Optional) Installing RRU PowerCables or (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables.




719

No.

Cabinet Item

17 IBBS200T The power cable for the storage batteries has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 4.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries andCables in the Battery Cabinet.





l All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.

l All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been set to OFF.

l All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T havebeen set to OFF.

l Switch on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T has been set to OFF.

l Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.

l Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.

Context



BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.

l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU formaintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.




720


BaseStation


BTS3900A(Ver.B)







BTS3900A(Ver.C)










721

BaseStation


BTS3900A(Ver.D)





NOTE






722






723






Cabinet Component





Fanassembly





IBBS200DorIBBS200T













724


Cabinet Component


















NOTE






725






units.







replace the board.




726


















727


Cabinet Component
























units.




728








replace the board.








----End




729




Procedure







----End

4.13.2 Sealing Cable HolesAfter all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable holes on the base.




730

Procedure

Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet, asshown in the following figure.

Figure 4-150 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet

(1) Fireproof mud

Step 2 Seal the RF cable holes in the RFC, as shown in the following figure.

1. Route the cables through the corresponding cable holes, and install the cable outlet moduleon the bottom of the cabinet.

2. Use rubber caps to seal the unused cable holes in the cable outlet module.

3. Tighten the screw on the cable outlet module.







(6) Screw - -




731

Step 3 Push the baffle plates on both sides of the base forwards until the baffle plates contact with thecables, and then tighten the screws on the baffle plates, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-152 Closing baffle plates of the cable holes on both sides of the base

Step 4 Push the baffle plate on the rear of the base forwards until the baffle plate contact with the cables,and then tighten the screw on the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 4-153 Closing the baffle plate of the cable hole on the rear of the base

Step 5 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base, as shown in the following figure.




732

Figure 4-154 Sealing cable holes on the base

(1) Fireproof mud

Step 6 Tighten the two screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate, as shownin the following figure.


----End


Prerequisites

Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to Table 4-45.




733





Procedure








734






NOTE


----End




735

5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with BreathableFilm) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)

About This Chapter

This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A (withbreathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).




5.4 Restructuring the APM30This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30to be restructured.

5.5 Restructuring the TMCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC tobe restructured.


5.7 Restructuring the BBCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the BBC tobe restructured.

5.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable


5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) toBTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)


736

A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure propergrounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinetsto ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.









737


5.1.1 Restructured Cabinets InteriorTo meet requirements in different outdoor environments, Huawei provides various cabinets forthe separated macro base station such as BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1) and distributed base stationsuch as DBS3900 (Ver.D_A1). The cabinets include the APM30 (Ver.D_A1), TMC(Ver.D_A1), RFC (Ver.D_A), and BBC (Ver.D_A1), which provide different functions.

APM30 InteriorThe following figure shows the APM30 interior.

Figure 5-1 APM30 interior

The following table describes the components in the APM30.




738

Table 5-1 Components in the APM30

No.

Component

OptionalorMandatory


Description


Mandatory

1 It is located on the front door of the cabinet and reports theambient temperature outside the cabinet.

2 Magnet of adoor statussensor

Mandatory

1 The door status sensor reports the door status, whetheropen or closed.

3 Breathablefilm

Mandatory

1 It is located on the front door of the cabinet and used forheat exchanging and dissipation.

4 Filler panel Mandatory

1 It replaces the APM Power Monitor unit Interface Board(APMI) and is used as an air damper.

5 Fanassemblyon the top ofthe cabinetinterior

Mandatory

1 The fan assembly on the top of the cabinet interior consistsof the support, fan interface board, and fan. The support isnewly developed. The fan interface board and fan arereused.

6 CMUEAassembly

Mandatory

1 The Central Monitoring Unit type EA (CMUEA) assemblyconsists of the support, CMUEA, and electronic label unit(ELU).

7 EPU Mandatory

1 The EPU converts AC power to DC power and feeds theDC power into the devices in the cabinet. The EPU consistsof the EPU subrack, PMU, and PSUs.

8 BBU Mandatory

1 The BBU is installed in the 2 U space below the EPU,processing baseband signals.




739

No.

Component

OptionalorMandatory


Description

9 SLPU Mandatory

2 l To provide protection for trunk signals, a signallightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory andinstalled in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It isconfigured with the universal E1/T1 lightningprotection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightningprotection unit (UFLP).

l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPUis optional and installed in the 1 U space below theBBU. It is configured with two universal signallightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.

10 GATM Optional

2 The GSM Antenna and TMA Control module (GATM)reports the RET control alarm signals.

11 EMUA Optional


12 AC heater Optional

1 The AC heater ensures that components in the cabinet workwithin the acceptable temperature range when thesurrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heaterand an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1U space above the SOU.

13 SOU Optional

1 The SOU can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom ofthe cabinet, transferring AC power supply to the customerequipment.

TMC InteriorThere are two types of TMC:

l One type of TMC houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration A in thefollowing figure.




740

l The other type of TMC houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, asshown in illustration B in the following figure.

Figure 5-2 TMC interior

The following table describes the components in the TMC.




741

Table 5-2 Components in the TMC

No.

Component

OptionalorMandatory


Description


Mandatory

1 It is located on the front door of the cabinet and reports theambient temperature outside the cabinet.

2 Magnet of adoor statussensor

Mandatory

1 The door status sensor reports the door status, whetheropen or closed.

3 Breathablefilm

Mandatory

1 It is located on the front door of the cabinet and used forheat exchanging and dissipation.

4 Filler panel Mandatory

1 It is used as an air damper when replacing the APM PowerMonitor unit Interface Board (APMI).

5 Fanassemblyon the top ofthe cabinetinterior

Mandatory

1 The fan assembly on the top of the cabinet interior consistsof the support, fan interface board, and fan. The support isnewly developed. The fan interface board and fan arereused.

6 CMUEAassembly

Mandatory

1 The Central Monitoring Unit type EA (CMUEA) assemblyconsists of the support, CMUEA, and electronic label unit(ELU).

7 DCDU Mandatory

1 The direct current distribution unit (DCDU), such as theDCDU-12B and DCDU-12C, is 1 U high and provides tenDC power outputs for components in the TMC.

8 BBU Mandatory

1 It is a baseband processing unit.




742

No.

Component

OptionalorMandatory


Description

9 SLPU Mandatory

2 l To provide protection for trunk signals, a signallightning protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory andinstalled in the top 1 U space of the cabinet. It isconfigured with the universal E1/T1 lightningprotection unit (UELP) or universal FE lightningprotection unit (UFLP).

l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPUis optional and installed in the 1 U space below theBBU. It is configured with two universal signallightning protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.

10 GATM Optional

2 The GSM Antenna and TMA Control module (GATM)reports the RET control signal alarms.

11 EMUA Optional


12 AC heater Optional

1 The AC heater ensures that components in the cabinet workwithin the acceptable temperature range when thesurrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1U space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heaterand an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1U space above the SOU.

RFC InteriorThe Radio Frequency Cabinet (RFC) is used by the BTS3900A and provides installation spacefor RFUs.

The following figure shows the RFC interior.




743

Figure 5-3 RFC interior

The following table describes the components in the RFC.

Table 5-3 Components in the RFC

No. Module/Board

OptionalorMandatory


Description

1 CMUEAassembly

Mandatory

1 The Central Monitoring Unit type EA(CMUEA) assembly consists of the supportand CMUEA.

2 DCDU-13A

Mandatory

2 The DCDU-13A is a direct currentdistribution unit. It provides four 30 A and-48 V DC power outputs.

3 ELUassembly

Mandatory

1 The ELU assembly consists of a supportand an electronic label unit (ELU). TheELU automatically reports the cabinet type.

4 Fanassembly

Mandatory

2 A fan assembly dissipates heat from thecabinet. It contains two standalone fans.

5 RFUs Mandatory

6 Radio frequency units (RFUs) are used inmacro base stations. They performmodulation and demodulation of basebandsignals and RF signals, data processing,power amplifying, and VSWR test.




744

BBC InteriorThe following figure shows the BBC interior.

Figure 5-4 BBC interior

The following table describes the components in the BBC.

Table 5-4 Components in the BBC

No. Module/Board

Optional orMandatory


Description

1 Junctionterminal forthe inputpower cableof the heatingfilm

Mandatory

1 The junction terminal provides the inputpower port for the heating film

2 Storagebattery

Mandatory

8 The storage batteries provide long-duration backup power for a base station.




745

No. Module/Board

Optional orMandatory


Description

3 Negativepower inputterminal forthe storagebattery group

Mandatory

1 It feeds power into the battery cabinet.

4 Positivepower inputterminal forthe storagebattery group(positivewiringterminal forstoragebatteries)

Mandatory

1 It feeds power into the battery cabinet.

5 Circuitbreaker for thestoragebatteries

Mandatory

1 It controls whether to connect theexternal power supply to the storagebatteries.

6 Negativewiringterminal forstoragebatteries

Mandatory

1 -

5.1.2 Restructuring ProcessThis section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade from BTS3900A(with breathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).

Restructuring Process in AC ScenariosThe following figure shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site suppliedwith AC power.




746


Restructuring Process in DC ScenariosThe following figure shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site suppliedwith DC power.




747




You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:

l Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properlybefore the upgrade.




748

l Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need tocontact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.







5.2.3 Document PreparationsThis section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.


– BTS3900A GSM Hardware Description (with Breathable Film)

– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description

– BTS3900A&DBS3900 Post-Upgrade Hardware Description

– BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide

– BTS3900A GSM Site Maintenance Guide (with Breathable Film)

– Safety Precautions






Diagonal pliers




749








Gloves - -






750




ContextNOTE






Procedure


If... Then...


Go to Step 2.




If... Then...







751

If... Then...



If... Then...






----End

5.4 Restructuring the APM30This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30to be restructured.

5.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring theAPM30

This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the APM30.

Component Changes in the APM30The following figure shows component changes in the APM30.




752

Figure 5-7 Components in the APM30

No. Component

Change Type

Description



2 APMI To beremoved

-

3 PMU To bereplaced

-

4 Fanassembly

To bereplaced


5 PSU (AC/DC)

To bereplaced


6 AFMU To bereplaced

The AFMU needs to be replaced with a CMUEAassembly, which contains an ELU. The ELU reports thecabinet type automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

7 Door statussensor

To bereused

-




753

No. Component

Change Type

Description

8 Powersubrack(AC/DC)

To bereplaced

The power subrack (AC/DC) needs to be replaced withan EPU 05 to meet the power requirement of a largeconfiguration.

9 PDU To bereplaced


-

11 GATM To beremoved

-

12 EMUA To bereused

The environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA)monitors the environment in a cabinet and processesalarms. The EMUA must be configured when more than16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. It is installed in the1 U space below the BBU.


-

- SLPU Added An SLPU can be added according to customerrequirements.

Cable Changes in the APM30Figure 5-8 lists the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the APM30.




754

Figure 5-8 Equipotential cable and power cables in the APM30


Connector


Connector



OTterminal

Groundpoint onthe innerwall of theAPM30

OTterminal

Front doorof theAPM30

To beremoved

P1 GATMpowercable

OTterminal

LOAD0terminal onthe PDU intheAPM30

OTterminal

-48Vterminal onthe GATM

To beremoved

P2 GATMpowercable

OTterminal


OTterminal

-48Vterminal onthe GATM

To beremoved




755


Connector


Connector


P3 EMUApowercable

OTterminal


Cord endterminal


To bereused

P4 AFMUpowercable

OTterminal


3V3connector

PWR porton theHEUA

To beremoved

P5 BBUpowercable

OTterminal


3V3connector

-48V porton the BBU

To bereplaced

P6 Powercable withthe transferterminal

Bare wire Transferterminal

OTterminal

ACOUTPUTterminal onthe EPU

To bereused

P7 Powercable foran ACheater

Bare wire ACOUTPUTterminal onthe PDU intheAPM30

Bare wire AC heater To bereused

The following figure shows the signal cable changes in the APM30.




756

Figure 5-9 Signal cable changes in the APM30




S0 Environment monitoringsignal cablefor thepowercabinet

DB50 maleconnector

J1 port onthe APMI inthe APM30

DB50 maleconnector

COM porton the PMUin theAPM30

To beremoved

S1 APMI-PMUmonitoringsignal cable

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

RS422 porton the APMIin theAPM30

To beremoved

S2 APMI-GATM1monitoringsignal cable

RJ45connector

COM INport on theHEUA

RJ45connector

COM OUTport on theGATM inthe fanassembly ofthe APM30

To beremoved




757





RJ45connector

COM INport on theGATM1

RJ45connector

MON1 porton theUPEU in theBBU

To beremoved


RJ45connector

COM INport on theGATM0

RJ45connector

MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU

To beremoved


2-pinconnector

TX+, TX-,RX+, andRX- on theAPMI in theAPM30


To bereused

S6 AFMUmonitoringsignal cable

DB15connector

J3 port onthe APMI inthe APM30

DB15connector

ALM porton theAFMU inthe APM30

To beremoved


DB9 maleconnector


RJ45connector


To bereused



GPS surgeprotector

SMA maleconnector

GPS port onthe USCU inthe BBU

To bereused

S9 GPS jumper N50 straightmaleconnector

GPS surgeprotector

N50 straightmaleconnector

GPSantenna

To bereused



Procedure





758




Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor.1. Set the circuit breaker on the PDU panel controlling the AFMU to OFF.

l When the APM30 is applied to a distributed base station, SW2 is the circuit breaker forcontrolling the AFMU.

l When the APM30 is applied to a separated base station, SW4 is the circuit breaker forcontrolling the AFMU.

2. Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 5-11 Removing the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor




759

Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove two hinges on the cabinet door and then remove the cabinetdoor, as shown in the following figure.



NOTE

One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.

1. Install the new front door, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two hinges to 1.4N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).


Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and that the barcodenumber starts with 212102.l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Illustration 1 in the following

figure shows the position of the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of thecabinet.

l If there is no such a barcode label on the inner wall of the cabinet, record the number on thebarcode label that is stuck on the front door, and stick a label carrying the same number tothe corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Illustration 2 in the followingfigure shows the position of the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.




760





----End


Prerequisites


Procedure







761

NOTE



Step 3 Remove the screws on the filler panel in the 1 U space below the fan assembly, and remove thefiller panel, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-14 Removing the filler panel


1. Label the cable between the fan assembly and the fan transfer board, and remove the cable.This cable needs to be reused. Attach temporary labels at one end of all cables beforeremoving them for recording cable connections.

2. Loosen the two captive screws on the tray holding the fan assembly, and use the handle onthe tray to pull the tray out of the cabinet.

CAUTIONWhen removing the fan assembly, do not touch any rotating fan to avoid injury of yourhands.


Step 6 Installing a new fan assembly, as shown in the following figure.

1. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten the two screws on thefan assembly to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

2. Reinstall the new filler panel delivered with the new fan assembly on the 1 U space belowthe fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the filler panel.




762



----End

5.4.4 Removing the APMIThis section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the APMI and installing thefiller panel.


Procedure



Step 2 Remove all cables from the APMI panel.

Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the APMI, and remove the APMI.

Step 4 Place the removed APMI in an ESD box or bag.

Step 5 Insert the filler panel in position, and secure the two captive screws on the filler panel to 0.6 N·m(5.31 lbf·in.).




763

The following figure shows how to replace the APMI with a filler panel.

Figure 5-16 Replacing the APMI


----End

5.4.5 Replacing the AFMUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the AFMU with a CMUEAassembly.

Prerequisites


Procedure



Step 2 Remove all cables from the AFMU panel.

Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on both sides of the AFMU, and remove theAFMU.




764

Step 4 Place the removed AFMU into the ESD box or bag.

Step 5 Take out the ELU and install it in the CMUEA assembly, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-17 Installing the ELU

Step 6 Pre-install cables on the CMUEA assembly.

1. Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU, as shown by a inthe following figure.

2. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly of the APM30 to theIFAN1 and IFAN2 ports at the rear of the CMUEA assembly, as shown by b in the followingfigure.

Figure 5-18 Pre-installing cables on the CMUEA assembly

Step 7 Align the CMUEA assembly with the positioning column at the rear part of the installationposition, and gently push the CMUEA assembly into position. Then, tighten the two captivescrews on the CMUEA assembly to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).The following figure shows how to replace the AFMU.




765

Figure 5-19 Replacing the AFMU


----End



Contextl Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.l The following figure shows the power systems before and after the upgrade. A shows the

exterior of the power subrack without the cover before the upgrade. B shows the exteriorof the power subrack after the upgrade.




766

Figure 5-20 Power systems before and after the upgrade

(1) PMU (2) PSU (3) PDU (4) Power subrack

Procedure



Step 2 Instruct the element management system (EMS) administrator to block all the carriers of thisbase station.

Step 3 Power off the base station.

1. Set the Bat circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.

2. Shut off the external power for the APM30H.

Step 4 Remove all cables from the power system.

1. Remove all monitoring signal cables from the PMU.

2. Remove power cables for storage batteries from the BAT(+) and BAT(-) terminals on thewiring unit of the power subrack.

3. Remove all cables from the PDU panel. The cables include the PGND cable, AC inputpower cables, AC and DC output power cables, and AC and DC surge protection signalcables.

Step 5 Remove the power system.

1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to loosen the screws on the ejector lever of the PMU or PSUpanel.

2. Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU or PSU out of the subrack and remove the PMUor PSU from the subrack, as shown in the following figure.




767

Figure 5-21 Removing the PMU or PSU

3. Remove the screws on both sides of the power subrack (AC/DC), and gently pull the power

subrack (AC/DC) out of the cabinet.4. Remove the screws on both sides of the PDU, and gently pull the PDU out of the cabinet.5. Place the removed AC or DC power subrack, PMU, PSUs, and PDU into the ESD box or

bag.

Step 6 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left side of thecabinet

NOTE

If the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC (35.6oF to37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperature alarms.

1. Remove the guide rails in the positions shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-22 Removing the guide rails

2. Remove the guide rail on the left side of the position where the power subrack is originally

installed, as shown by a in the following figure. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve thescrews.




768

3. Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mountingbar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton paddingcontacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in the following figure.

4. Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 6.2 to secure the guide rails attached withwindproof cotton padding, and tighten the screws to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown by cin the following figure.

Figure 5-23 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the innerleft side of the cabinet

5. Remove the first and second M6 screws on the upper left side of the cabinet, and then use

them to secure the windproof cotton padding in the original place, and tighten the screwsto 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.




769

Figure 5-24 Installing windproof cotton padding on the upper left side of the cabinet

Step 7 Install the windproof cotton padding on the inner back side of the cabinet.1. Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton

padding for about 3 cm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in the following figure.2. Place the windproof cotton padding on the surface of the rail and push it towards the back

of the cabinet, and completely strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproofcotton padding on back of the cabinet. These operation is shown by b in the followingfigure.

Figure 5-25 Installing windproof cotton padding at the back side of the cabinet

Step 8 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet. If there areother modules installed at the bottom of the cabinet, skip this step.




770

1. Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cottonpadding for about 3 cm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in the following figure.

2. Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completelystrip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of thecabinet. These operations are shown by b and c in the following figure.


Step 9 Install the mounting part attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of thecabinet.

NOTE

If the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC (35.6oF to37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperature alarms.


screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as shown in the followingfigure.




771


Step 10 Install the new power system.1. Add six floating nuts to the mounting bars for securing the power system. The following

figure shows the positions.

Figure 5-28 Installing floating nuts

2. Place the new power system in the installation position and gently push it into the cabinet

along the guide rails. Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven M6x12 panel screws to2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).




772

3. Use M6x12 screws to secure the PGND cable for the new power system to the ground bar.The recommended torque is 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).

----End


Contextl The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured along with DRFUs. When DRFUs are removed,

the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.

l If the BTS3900A has two GATMs, remove the upper one before the lower one.

Procedurel Remove the GATM.

1. Remove the connector on the power cable for the GATM from the LOAD0 terminalon the PDU to power off the GATM.


3. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the PGND cable for the GATM. Then use awrench to remove the RF jumper from the GATM.

4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, and removethe GATM. Reinstall the removed screws on their original positions on the mountingbar, as shown in the following figure.


l Remove the Bias-Tee.




773

1. Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable, and PGND cable from theBias-Tee.


----End

5.4.8 Installing the Filler Module and Filler PanelIn the APM30 and TMC, the filler module must be installed in the vacant customer space,preventing the heat reflux in the empty space.


Procedurel Install the filler module.

1. Install the filler module in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to thesecure the filler module to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.


l Install the filler panel.1. Install the filler panel in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to the

secure the filler panel to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-31 Installing the filler panel

----End

5.4.9 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30 afterrestructuring the APM30.




774


ContextThe following table describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.





CMUEApower cable

EPC6connector


3V3connector



EMUApower cable

EPC4connector


Cord endterminal



BBU powercable

EPC4connector


3V3connector



The following table describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.





Monitoringsignal cablefor the fanassembly

4-pinconnector

IFAN1 andIFAN2 portson thetransferboard for thefan assembly

4-pinconnector

CMUEA To be reused




775





4-pinconnector

Transferterminal onthe front doorof theAPM30

4-pinconnector

FAN_EXT0andFAN_EXT1ports on theCMUEA


Monitoringsignal cablefor the doorstatus sensorin theAPM30

2-pinconnector

GATE porton the PMU


To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector



ELU signalcable

RJ45connector

ELU RJ45connector



PMU-CMUEAmonitoringsignal cable

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on theCMUEA



DB9 maleconnector


RJ45connector



Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor nearthe frontdoor

5-pinconnector

Temperaturesensor nearthe left innerwall and thefront door

4-pinconnector


To be reused




776




Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor nearthe airexhaust vent

5-pinconnector

Temperaturesensor nearthe airexhaust ventthat is at thetop right sideof the cabinet

4-pinconnector

TEMP2 porton theCMUEA

To be reused


Remove related cables in the cabinet according to the cable changes in 5.4.1 InformationYou Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30. Skip this step if you have removedthese cables when replacing related modules.

l Install power cables in the APM30.1. Install the power cable for the 8-pin transfer terminal, as shown by P0 in Figure

5-32.

a. Connect one end of the cable to the AC OUTPUT port on the EPU.

b. No operation is required for the other end of the cable because it has already beenconnected to the 8-pin transfer terminal.



b. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable for the fan assemblyto the LOAD2 port on the EPU.

c. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the CMUEA, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws on the 3V3connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).



b. Add the removed EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable. Fordetailed operations, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

NOTE


c. Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the BBU power cable to the -48V porton the UPEU in the BBU, and connect the EPC4 connector at the other end tothe LOAD0 port on the panel of the EPU.

4. Optional: Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P3 in Figure 5-32.





777

b. Add a connector to each end of the power cable and you can use the EPC4connector removed in 4.1. For detailed operations, see Assembling the Cord EndTerminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and thePower Cable.

c. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD5 porton the EPU.

d. Connect the cord end terminal at the other end of the power cable to the PWR1port on the EMUA.

Figure 5-32 Installing power cables in the APM30



l Install signal cables in the APM30.


a. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to theGATE port on the PMU.

b. Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the door status sensor.


a. Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU.




778

b. Connect the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU port on the fanassembly.


NOTICEBind the interconnected monitoring signal transfer cable for the fan in the front doorto the cable bridge on the front door to prevent the cabinet door from extruding theinterconnection terminal.

a. Connect one end of the cable to the transfer terminal on the monitoring signalcable that comes out of the front door.

b. Connect the other end of the cable to the FAN_EXT0 and FAN_EXT1 ports onthe CMUEA.


a. Connect one end of the cable to the IFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the CMUEA.b. Connect the other end of the cable to the transfer board in the fan assembly.


a. Connect one end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the COM_INport on the CMUEA.

b. Connect the other end of the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable to the MON1port on the UPEU in the BBU.


a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signalcable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the PMU-CMUEA monitoringsignal cable to the COM_IN port on the PMU.


a. Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the EMUA monitoring signalcable to the RS485 port on the EMUA.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the EMUA monitoring signalcable to the COM_OUT port on the PMU.


a. Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5-pin straight socket of the temperature sensor on the left side of the cabinet.

b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEM port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly.

9. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent,as shown by S9 in Figure 5-33.




779

a. Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5-pin straight socket of the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent that is onthe right side of the fan assembly.

b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEMP2 port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly.

Figure 5-33 Installing signal cables in the APM30



----End

5.5 Restructuring the TMCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC tobe restructured.




780

5.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMCThis section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the TMC.

Component Changes in the TMC

There are three types of TMCs:

l When a TMC serves as a transmission cabinet, it only provides space for the transmissionequipment and a DCDU-03A is installed in it. Illustration A in the following figure showsthis type of TMC.

l When a TMC serves as the power cabinet of the DBS3900, the TMC is supplied with -48V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-03B are installed in it. Illustration B in thefollowing figure shows this type of TMC.

l When a TMC serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, the TMC is supplied with -48V DC power, and a BBU3900 and a DCDU-06A are installed in it. Illustration C in thefollowing figure shows this type of TMC.

Figure 5-34 Components in the TMC




781

No. Component

Change Type

Description


The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heatdissipation capacity.

2 Fanassembly

To bereplaced


3 DCDU To bereplaced

l When the TMC serves as a transmission cabinet, theDCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12C.

l When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of theDBS3900, the DCDU needs to be replaced with aDCDU-12B.

l When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of theBTS3900A, the DCDU needs to be replaced with aDCDU-12C.

4 Door statussensor

To bereused

-


-

6 GATM To beremoved

-

7 EMUA To bereused

-


-

Cable Changes in the TMCCable connections in TMCs vary according to the configurations of TMCs. The following figureshows the cable changes in the TMC serving as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A.




782

Figure 5-35 Equipotential cable and power cables in the TMC





ChangeType

P0 Equipotential cableforgroundingof thefront door

OTterminal


OTterminal

Groundpoint in theinnerlower leftside of thecabinet

To beremoved

P1 AFMUpowercable


P2 BBUpowercable

OTterminal

l BBUterminal on theDCDU-06A

l LOAD6terminal on theDCDU-03A

l LOAD6terminal on theDCDU-03B

3V3connector

-48V porton theUPEU inthe BBU

To bereplaced




783





ChangeType

P3 EMUApowercable

OTterminal

l SPARE3terminal on theDCDU-06A

l LOAD7terminal on theDCDU-03A

l LOAD7terminal on theDCDU-03B

Cord endterminal

PWR1terminalon theEMUA

To bereused

P4 GATMpowercable

OTterminal

Load0 porton thePDU in theTMC

OTterminal

-48V porton theGATM

To bereplaced

Figure 5-36 shows the signal cable changes in the TMC that houses the BBU3900 and is suppliedwith -48 V DC power.

Figure 5-36 Signal cable changes in the TMC




784





ChangeType


4-pinconnector

Transferbox on theinner leftwall nearthe frontdoor of theTMC

4-pinconnector

FAN_EXT port ontheCMUA

To bereplaced

S2 AFMUmonitoring signalcable



DB9 maleconnector

RS-485port on theEMUA

RJ45connector

COM_OUT port ontheCMUA

To bereused


SMA maleconnector

GPS porton theUSCU inthe BBU


GPS surgeprotector

To bereused

S5 GPSjumper


GPS surgeprotector


GPSantenna

To bereused

S6 GATM-BBUmonitoring signalcable

RJ45connector

COM_INport on theGATM inthe TMC

RJ45connector

COM_OUT port onthe BBUin theTMC

To beremoved






785

ContextThe TMC and APM30s have the same front door. This section describes the procedure forreplacing the cabinet door, using the APM30 as an example.

Procedure





Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor.1. Set the circuit breaker on the PDU panel controlling the AFMU to OFF.

l When the APM30 is applied to a distributed base station, SW2 is the circuit breaker forcontrolling the AFMU.

l When the APM30 is applied to a separated base station, SW4 is the circuit breaker forcontrolling the AFMU.

2. Remove the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor, as shown in the followingfigure.




786

Figure 5-38 Removing the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor

Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove two hinges on the cabinet door and then remove the cabinetdoor, as shown in the following figure.



NOTE

One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.

1. Install the new front door, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the two hinges to 1.4N·m (12.39 lbf·in.).





787

Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and that the barcodenumber starts with 212102.

l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Illustration 1 in the followingfigure shows the position of the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of thecabinet.

l If there is no such a barcode label on the inner wall of the cabinet, record the number on thebarcode label that is stuck on the front door, and stick a label carrying the same number tothe corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Illustration 2 in the followingfigure shows the position of the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.





----End


Prerequisites


Context

This section describes the procedure for replacing the fan assembly in an APM30 as an example.The fan assembly used in a TMC is the same as that used in an APM30.




788

Procedure






Step 3 Remove the screws on the filler panel in the 1 U space below the fan assembly, and remove thefiller panel, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-41 Removing the filler panel

Step 4 Remove the fan assembly.1. Label the cable between the fan assembly and the fan transfer board, and remove the cable.

This cable needs to be reused. Attach temporary labels at one end of all cables beforeremoving them for recording cable connections.

2. Loosen the two captive screws on the tray holding the fan assembly, and use the handle onthe tray to pull the tray out of the cabinet.




789

CAUTIONWhen removing the fan assembly, do not touch any rotating fan to avoid injury of yourhands.


Step 6 Installing a new fan assembly, as shown in the following figure.

1. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten the two screws on thefan assembly to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).

2. Reinstall the new filler panel delivered with the new fan assembly on the 1 U space belowthe fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the filler panel.



----End

5.5.4 Removing the APMIThis section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the APMI and installing thefiller panel.

Prerequisites





790

ContextThis section describes the procedure for removing the APMI in an APM30 as an example. TheAPMI used in a TMC is the same as that used in an APM30.

Procedure



Step 2 Remove all cables from the APMI panel.

Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on the APMI, and remove the APMI.

Step 4 Place the removed APMI in an ESD box or bag.

Step 5 Gently push the filler panel in position, and secure the two screws on the filler panel to 2 N·m(17.70 lbf·in.).The following figure shows how to replace the APMI with a filler panel.

Figure 5-43 Replacing the APMI


----End

5.5.5 Replacing the AFMUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the AFMU with a CMUEAassembly.




791

Prerequisites


Context

This section describes the procedure for replacing the AFMU in an APM30 as an example. TheAFMU used in a TMC is the same as that used in an APM30.

Procedure



Step 2 Remove all cables from the AFMU panel.

Step 3 Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on both sides of the AFMU, and remove theAFMU.

Step 4 Place the removed AFMU into the ESD box or bag.

Step 5 Take out the ELU and install it in the CMUEA assembly, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-44 Installing the ELU

Step 6 Pre-install cables on the CMUEA assembly.

1. Connect one end of the ELU signal cable to the RJ45 port on the ELU, as shown by a inthe following figure.

2. Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly of the APM30 to theIFAN1 and IFAN2 ports at the rear of the CMUEA assembly, as shown by b in the followingfigure.




792

Figure 5-45 Pre-installing cables on the CMUEA assembly

Step 7 Align the CMUEA assembly with the positioning column at the rear part of the installationposition, and gently push the CMUEA assembly into position. Then, tighten the two captivescrews on the CMUEA assembly to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).The following figure shows how to replace the AFMU.

Figure 5-46 Replacing the AFMU


----End




793

5.5.6 Replacing the DCDUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-03A, DCDU-03B,or DCDU-06A.


Context

TMCs can be configured with different models of DCDUs, which include the DCDU-03A,DCDU-03B, and DCDU-06A. The DCDU needs to be replaced with a DCDU-12B orDCDU-12C during the upgrade.

l When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of the BTS3900A, replace the DCDU with aDCDU-12C.

l When the TMC serves as the power cabinet of the DBS3900, replace the DCDU with aDCDU-12B.

l When the TMC serves as a transmission cabinet of the BTS3900A or DBS3900, replacethe DCDU with a DCDU-12C.

This section describes the procedure for replacing the DCDU-03B with a DCDU-12B. Othermodels of DCDUs are removed and installed in the same way.

Procedure



Step 2 Shut off the external power supply to the power off the DCDU-03B.

NOTE

l If a DCDU-03A is configured, you can turn the SW6 circuit breaker on the PDU in the APM30 to OFF topower off the DCDU-03A.

l If a DCDU-06A configured, shut off the external power supply to power off the DCDU-06A.

Step 3 Remove the DCDU-03B, as shown in the following figure.

1. Remove all connectors from the DCDU-03B panel.

2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminalblock from the DCDU-03B, as shown in the following figure.




794

3. Remove the input power cables and equipotential cable for the DCDU-03B from theterminals.

4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-03B,and gently pull the DCDU-03B out of the cabinet along the guide rails.

Figure 5-47 Removing the DCDU-03B

Step 4 Place the DCDU-03B and protective cover into the ESD box or bag.

Step 5 Install the DCDU-12C.

1. Hold the DCDU-12C with both hands and slide the DCDU-12C into the cabinet until themounting ears on the DCDU-12C contact the columns.

2. Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12C to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.).




795


----End

5.5.7 Installing the Filler Module and Filler PanelIn the APM30 and TMC, the filler module must be installed in the vacant customer space,preventing the heat reflux in the empty space.


Procedurel Install the filler module.

1. Install the filler module in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to thesecure the filler module to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.


l Install the filler panel.

1. Install the filler panel in the vacant customer space, and use four M6 screws to thesecure the filler panel to 2 N·m (17.7 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-49 Installing the filler panel

----End

5.5.8 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC afterrestructuring the TMC.




796







CMUEApower cable

EPC4connector


3V3connector



BBU powercable

EPC4connector

LOAD6 orLOAD7 porton theDCDU-12Cin the TMC

3V3connector

-48V port onthe UPEU inthe BBU ofthe TMC


EMUApower cable

EPC4connector


Cord endterminal








Monitoringsignal cablefor the fanassembly

4-pinconnector

IFAN1 andIFAN2 portson thetransferboard for thefan assembly

4-pinconnector

4-pinconnectorthat comesout of theCMUEA

To be reused




797





4-pinconnector

Transferterminal onthe frontdoor of theTMC

4-pinconnector

EFAN1 andEFAN2 portson theCMUEA





To be reused


RJ45connector


RJ45connector



ELU signalcable

RJ45connector

ELU RJ45connector




DB9 maleconnector


RJ45connector



Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor nearthe frontdoor

5-pinconnector

Temperaturesensor nearthe left innerwall and thefront door

4-pinconnector


To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor nearthe airexhaust vent

5-pinconnector

Temperaturesensor nearthe airexhaust ventthat is at thetop right sideof the cabinet

4-pinconnector


To be reused




798


Remove related cables in the cabinet according to the cable changes in 5.5.1 InformationYou Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC. Skip this step if you have removedthese cables when replacing related modules.

l Install power cables in the TMC.1. Install the CMUEA power cable, as shown by P1 in Figure 5-50.

a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable for the fan assemblyto the LOAD9 port on the DCDU-12C.

b. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the CMUEA, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws on the 3V3connector to 0.25 N·m (2.21 lbf·in.).

2. Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 5-50. If no BBUis installed in this cabinet, skip this step.


b. Connect the EPC4connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD6 orLOAD7 port on the DCDU-12C.

c. Connect the 3V3 power connector at the other end of the power cable to the -48Vport on the UPEU in the BBU.

3. Optional: Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P3 in Figure 5-50.

a. Replace the OT terminal at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4connector, as described in Table 5-8. For details about how to replace theterminals, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD8 porton the DCDU-12C.

c. Connect the cord end terminal at the other end of the power cable to the PWR1port on the EMUA.




799

Figure 5-50 Installing power cables in the TMC



l Install signal cables in the TMC.1. Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S1 in Figure

5-51.

a. Cut off the 2-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable, and stripthe jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.


2. Optional: Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S2 inFigure 5-51. If no BBU is installed in this cabinet, skip this step.

a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to theCOM_IN port on the CMUEA.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU.


a. Connect one end of the cable to the transfer terminal on the monitoring signalcable that comes out of the front door.

b. Connect the other end of the cable to the EFAN1 and EFAN2 ports on theCMUEA.




800

4. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly in the TMC, as shown by S4in Figure 5-50.

a. Connect the other end of the cable to the IFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the transferboard in the fan assembly.

b. Connect the other end of the cable to the 4-pin terminal that comes out of theCMUEA.


a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the port on the topof the ELU.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the ELU porton the fan assembly.


a. Connect the DB9 male connector at one end of the signal cable to the RS485 porton the EMUA.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the COM_OUTport on the CMUEA.

7. Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent,as shown by S7 in Figure 5-51.

a. Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5-pin straight socket of the temperature sensor on the left side of the cabinet.



a. Connect the 5-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to the 5-pin straight socket of the temperature sensor near the air exhaust vent that is onthe right side of the fan assembly.





801

Figure 5-51 Installing signal cables in the TMC



----End







802


No. Component

Change Type

Description

1 FMUA To bereplaced

The FMUA needs to be replaced with a CMUEAassembly.


The DCDU-02 needs to be replaced with a DCDU-13Ato enhance the power distribution capacity.


The filler panel needs to be replaced with an ELUassembly. The ELU reports the cabinet typeautomatically. It needs to be added to facilitatetroubleshooting.

4 Door statussensor

To bereused

-

5 Fan To bereused

-


To bereused

-




803







ChangeType

P1 to P6 RFUpowercables

Parallelterminal

RFU0terminalon theDCDU-02

- - To bereplaced

P7 FMUApowercable

Parallelterminal

FMUAterminalon theDCDU-02

3V3connector

PWR porton theFMUA

To bereplaced





804






ChangeType

S1 DCDU-FMUAmonitoring signalcable

Cord endterminal

TEM_HUMARRESTER

RJ45connector

SPD ALMport on theDCDU-02

To bereplaced

S2 and S3 FMUA-FANmonitoring signalcable

4-pinconnector

FAN porton theFMUA

- FAN unit To bereplaced


2-pinconnector

GATEport on theCMUA


To bereused




805





ChangeType

S5 Monitoring signalcable forthetemperature sensor inthe RFC

4-pinconnector

TEM porton the fanassemblyin the RFC

Temperature sensor

Air intakevent at thebottom ofthe RFC

To bereplaced



a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.l The FMUA is removed, and the fan assembly stops working.

Procedure



Step 2 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fan assembly,and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shown in the followingfigure.


Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tightenthe four screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown in the followingfigure. The recommended torque is 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).




806

Figure 5-55 Replacing the fan assembly in the RFC


----End

5.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler PanelThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the FMUA assembly andfiller panel.

Prerequisites


Procedure



Step 2 Turn the FMUA circuit breaker on the left of the DCDU-02 panel to OFF.

Step 3 Record the cable connections on the FMUA panel, and remove all cables.




807

Step 4 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the FMUA, and gentlypull the FMUA out of the cabinet along the guide rails.

Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, andremove the filler panel.

Step 6 Place the removed FMUA assembly and filler panel into ESD boxes or bags.

Step 7 Place the CMUEA assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Usea torque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.

Figure 5-56 Installing the CMUEA assembly

Step 8 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the filler panel, and gentlypull the filler panel out of the cabinet.

Step 9 Place the ELU assembly in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use atorque screwdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.




808

Figure 5-57 Installing the ELU assembly


----End

5.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-02 with aDCDU-13A.

Prerequisites


Procedure



Step 2 Instruct the M2000/U2000 administrator to block all the carriers of this base station.

Step 3 Turn all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU-02 to OFF to power off the fan assembly andRFUs.




809

Step 4 Power off the DCDU-02.l In AC scenarios, turn the SW8 and SW9 circuit breakers on the PDU in the APM30H to

OFF.l In DC scenarios, shut off the external power supply.

Step 5 Remove the two DCDU-02 units on the left and right, as shown in the following figure.1. Record the position of connectors on the DCDU-02, and remove the connectors.2. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminals

on the DCDU-02.3. Remove the input power cables and PGND cable from the DCDU-02.4. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each side of the DCDU-02, and

gently pull the DCDU-02 out of the cabinet along the guide rails.

Figure 5-58 Removing the DCDU-02 units

Step 6 Place the removed DCDU-02 units and protective covers in ESD boxes or bags.

Step 7 Place the DCDU-13A in the installation position, and gently push it into the cabinet. Use a torquescrewdriver to tighten the four M4 screws to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the followingfigure.




810



----End

5.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFUThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the RFU.

PrerequisitesThe following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or ESDgloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.


V2, MRFU V2a, and WRFU.l RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU

V2, MRFU V2a WRFU, and LRFU.l RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU

V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, WRFUa, and LRFU.l If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) or WRFUa is not faulty, disable its maximum output

power locking for TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.l Replacing an RFU interrupts services carried by the RFU.l Replacing an RFU takes about 6 to 10 minutes.l The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured along with DRFUs. When DRFUs are removed,

the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be removed. For details about how to remove theGATM and Bias-Tee, see 4.4.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.

l A handle is used during the replacement. The handle is placed on the lower left side of thedocument holder on the cabinet door, as shown in the following figure.




811


NOTE


Procedure


NOTE



1. Check the maximum output power has been locked for TX channels of the new RFU, andrecord the result.l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet

number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU. Run theDSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number,and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum output power forTX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has been locked.






812

If... Then...


Go to Step 1.2.


Go to 2.

NOTE



l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable themaximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to resetthe RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum outputpower of each RFU is set successfully.



NOTE


Step 2 Ask the administrator of element management system (EMS) to block the RFU.




NOTE









813

NOTE


Step 5 Remove the RFU to be replaced.1. Set the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to OFF to power off

the RFU.2. Label the power cable for the RFU to be replaced, and disconnect the cable.3. Label the RF jumper for the RFU to be replaced, loosen the DIN 7/16 male elbow connector

on the RF jumper, and disconnect the RF jumper.4. Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the cable.5. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws at the four corners of the RFU, and then





Step 6 Install the new RFU.1. Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the rails until it snaps into place.2. Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners on the RFU panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.) to

secure the RFU to the subrack.3. Reconnect power cable and RF jumper to the RFU panel.4. Use a wrench to tighten the connector on the jumper and feeder to 25 N·m to 35 N·m (221.25

lbf·in. to 309.75 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.




814

Figure 5-62 Tightening the connector on the jumper and feeder



----End

5.6.6 Installing Cables in the CabinetThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC after yourestructure the RFC.








Description

CMUEApower cable

EPC4connector

LOAD3 porton the leftDCDU-13A

3V3connector






815





Description

Power cablebetweenDCDU-13As

OT terminal(M6)

RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals onthe leftDCDU-13Ain the RFC

OT terminal RTN(+) andNEG(-)terminals onthe rightDCDU-13Ain the RFC


RFU powercable

EPC4connector

One of theLOAD0 toLOAD2ports on bothDCDU-13As

3V3connector









Description




To be reused

ELU signalcable

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

ELU port onthe ELUassembly



4-pinconnector


Temperaturesensor

Air intakevent at thebottom of theRFC


Surgeprotectionalarm cablefor theDCDU

Bare wire IN0 and IN1ports on theCMUEA

Bare wire DC ALARMport on theDCDU-13A





816





Description

Monitoringsignal cablefor the leftfan


Bare wire EFAN1 andEFAN2 portson theCMUEAassembly


Monitoringsignal cablefor the rightfan


4-pinconnector

Transferterminal forthe CMUEAassembly




a. Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the LOAD3 porton the left DCDU-13A.

b. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the CMUEA.

2. Optional: Install the power cable between DCDU-13As, as shown by P2 in Figure5-63. Skip this step in DC scenarios.

a. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals on the left DCDU-13A in the RFC.

b. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) andNEG(-) terminals on the right DCDU-13A in the RFC.


a. For RFU 0 to RFU 2, connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cableto one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the left DCDU-13A.

b. For RFU 3 to RFU 5, connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cableto one of the LOAD0 to LOAD2 ports on the right DCDU-13A.

c. Connect the 3V3 connector at the other end of the power cable to the PWR porton the RFU.




817






a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the signal cable to the ELU port onthe ELU assembly.

b. Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the signal cable to the ELU porton the CMUEA.


a. Cut off the 2-pin connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable, and stripa length of 8 mm (0.31 in.) jacket off the cable to expose the core wire.



a. Connect the RJ45 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable to thetemperature sensor near the air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.

b. Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable tothe TEM port on the CMUEA.




818

4. Install the surge protection alarm cable for the left DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 inFigure 5-64.



5. Install the surge protection alarm cable for the right DCDU-13A, as shown by S4 inFigure 5-64.



6. Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan, as shown by S5 in Figure 5-64.

a. Connect the cables that come out of the left fan assembly to the EFAN1 andEFAN2 ports on the CMUEA.

b. Connect the cables that come out of the right fan assembly to the 4-pin terminalsthat come out of the CMUEA. Those 4-pin terminals have been connected to theIFAN1 and IFAN2 ports on the rear of the CMUEA.






819


----End

5.7 Restructuring the BBCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the BBC tobe restructured.

5.7.1 Information You Need to Known Before Reconstructing theBBC

This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and addedduring the restructuring of the BBC.

Component Changes in the BBCThe following figure shows component changes in the BBC.

Figure 5-65 Components in the BBC




820

No. Component

Change Type

Description

1 Inputwiringterminal forthe inputpowercable forthe heatingfilm

To bereused

-

2 Storagebattery

To bereused

-

3, 4, and6

Wiringterminalsfor powercables forstoragebatteries

To bereplaced

The wiring terminals on the storage batteries need to bereplaced for installing cables with a cross-sectional areaof 35 mm 2 (0.54 in.2).

5 Circuitbreaker forthe storagebatterygroup

To bereplaced

The circuit breaker for the storage battery group needs tobe replaced for inputting larger power.

Cable Changes in the BBCThe following figure shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the BBC.




821



Connector


Connector



OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)

Groundpoint onthe rack

To bereused

P1 RTN(+)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries

OTterminal(M8)

Wiringterminalfor storagebatteries

OTterminal(M6)

Positivewiring bar

To bereplaced

P2 NEG(-)cable forthe upperstoragebatteries

OTterminal(M8)


OTterminal(M6)

Negativewiring bar

To bereplaced




822


Connector


Connector


P3 RTN(+)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries

OTterminal(M8)


OTterminal(M6)

Positivewiring bar

To bereplaced

P4 NEG(-)cable forthe lowerstoragebatteries

OTterminal(M8)


OTterminal(M6)

Negativewiring bar

To bereplaced

P5 Powercable forthe heatingfilm

- Heatingfilm

OTterminal(M6)

Transferterminal

To bereused

P6 and P7 Powercablebetweenthe wiringterminaland circuitbreaker onthe storagebatteries

OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M8)

Circuitbreaker

To bereplaced

The following figure shows signal cable changes in the cabinet.




823



Connector


Connector



Bare wire Transferterminalfor thesignalcable

Cord endterminal

Doorstatussensor

To bereused

S1 Monitoring signalcable forthetemperature sensor inthe batterycabinet

2-pinconnector

BAT_TEM1 port onthe APMI

OTterminal

Cablebridge onthe leftside of theupperstoragebatterycompartment

To bereused




824

5.7.2 Replacing the Wiring Terminals and Circuit BreakersThis section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the wiring terminals andcircuit breakers.



Procedure




1. Optional: Set the AC OUT circuit breaker on the PDU panel in the APM30H to OFF topower off the heating film in the battery cabinet. Skip this step if the battery cabinet is notconfigured with a heating film.

2. Set the circuit breaker for the storage battery group on the inner right wall of the batterycabinet to OFF.

3. Set the BAT circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.


1. Use temporary labels to mark the input power cables for the positive and negative poles onthe storage batteries and the copper bars between the storage batteries, and remove the inputpower cables and copper bars.

2. Use a screwdriver to loosen the screws on the baffle plate and then remove the baffle plate.

3. Pull the storage batteries until one-third of the length is out, remove the screws on the polesof the storage batteries, and then remove the input power cables for the storage batterygroup and the copper bars between the storage batteries.

4. Use both hands to remove the storage batteries at this layer and put them at a proper place.




825

NOTE

l Remove the baffle plate and storage batteries layer by layer from top down. After removing thebaffle plate at a layer, you must remove all storage batteries at the layer before removing thebaffle plate at the lower layer.



Step 4 Remove all the power cables from the wiring terminals and circuit breakers.

Step 5 Remove the wiring terminals and circuit breakers, as shown in Figure 5-68.1. Open the cover for the wiring terminals, remove the screw and then the wiring terminals.2. Remove the two screws on the circuit breakers and then the circuit breakers. Reserve the

two M4 screws, spring washers, and flat washers for future use.

Figure 5-68 Removing the wiring terminals and circuit breakers

3. Place the removed wiring terminals and circuit breakers into the ESD box or bag.

Step 6 Install the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers, as shown in the following figure.1. Attach the new wiring terminals to the positions of the removed ones in sequence, and use

one M4 screw to secure each wiring terminal.2. Attach the new circuit breakers to the positions of the removed ones, and use the two M4

screws reserved in Step 5.2 to secure the circuit breakers.3. Install power cables between the wiring terminals and circuit breakers.




826

Figure 5-69 Installing the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers

Step 7 Connect power cables to the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers, as shown in the followingfigure.

Figure 5-70 Connecting power cables to the new wiring terminals and circuit breakers

(1) Negative terminal forthe upper storage batteries

(2) Positive terminal forthe upper storage batteries

(3) Negative terminal forthe lower storage batteries

(4) Positive terminal forthe lower storage batteries




827

----End










Description

Power cablefor theheating filmin the batterycabinet

- Heating film OT terminal(M6)

Transferterminal

To be reused


OT terminal(M6)

Storagebattery

OT terminal(M8)

Wiringterminal forstoragebatteries



OT terminal(M6)

Storagebattery

OT terminal(M8)






828





Description


OT terminal(M6)

Storagebattery

OT terminal(M8)




OT terminal(M6)

Storagebattery

OT terminal(M8)



Procedure



Step 2 Install the storage batteries.1. Install the storage batteries from bottom up and from left to right.2. Remove the covers from the wiring terminals of the storage batteries, and install copper

bars between the poles of neighboring storage batteries for series connection.




829


Step 3 Install the power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-72 Installing the power cables for the storage batteries



----End




830

5.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential CableA PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure propergrounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinetsto ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.

Prerequisites

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a cable cutter, and a multi-purposecrimping tool.

Context

The principles for grounding a BTS3900A are as follows:

l The upper and lower cabinets must be connected through an equipotential cable.

l The lower cabinets are connected to the RFC through an equipotential cable.

l The RFC is connected to the ground busbar through a PGND cable.

The principles for grounding a DBS3900 are as follows:

l The upper and lower cabinets must be connected through an equipotential cable.

l The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to otherlower cabinets through equipotential cables.

l The BBC or IBBS200T below the basic APM30 or APM30H must be connected to anexternal ground bar through a PGND cable.

The following table lists the specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable.

Table 5-13 Specifications of a PGND cable and an equipotential cable

Cable Cross-Sectional Area ofthe Core Wire and Size ofthe OT Terminal

Color

PGND cable OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or0.025 in.2)

Green and yellow

Equipotentialcable

OT terminal (M6, 16 mm2 or0.025 in.2)

Procedure

Step 1 Prepare the PGND cable and equipotential cable.


2. Add OT terminals to both ends of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling theOT Terminal and the Power Cable.




831

Step 2 Install the PGND cable, as shown in Figure 5-74.1. Connect one end of the PGND cable to the ground bar on the inner wall of the RFC, and

then use spring washers and screws to secure the OT terminals of the PGND cable.

NOTE

When installing a PGND cable, tightly press the OT terminal in the correct direction, as shown inthe following figure.

Figure 5-73 Installing an OT terminal correctly

2. Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the external ground copper bar, as shown in

the following figure.




832

Figure 5-74 Installing a PGND cable

(1) Ground bar in the cabinet (2) PGND cable (3) Onsite ground bar

----End




833


5.9.1 Installing a BBU CaseThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in anAPM30 or TMC.


Context

When two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode base station, the BBUs are installed as follows:

l During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30, the BBUis installed in the APM30. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC.

l When a second BBU is installed in the APM30, it is recommended that the second BBUbe installed right above or below the original BBU without removing the guide rails.

Figure 5-75 shows the positions for installing BBU cases in an APM30 and a TMC.

Figure 5-75 Positions for installing BBU cases

Procedure

Step 1 Record the electronic serial number (ESN) on the BBU case and report it to the base stationcommissioning personnel. For details, see Obtaining the ESN.

Step 2 Install cable claws on the BBU, as shown in Figure 5-76.

1. Align the two cable claws with the holes on both sides of the BBU case.

2. Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.).




834

Figure 5-76 Installing cable claws on the BBU case

Step 3 Install the BBU case, as shown in Figure 5-77.

1. Place the BBU on the guide rails and gently push the BBU case into the cabinet.

2. Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ear on each side of the BBU case to 2 N·m(17.70 lbf·in.).

Figure 5-77 Installing a BBU case

Step 4 Install the BBU power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 5-78.






835

NOTE



3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on theEPU in the APM30.

NOTE

Figure 5-78 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30. When the BBU case is installed in a TMC, the cableconnections are the same.





NOTE



3. Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD8 port on theDCDU-12C in the TMC.




836

CAUTIONEnsure that the BBU power cable for a BBU added to a running base station is connected to theBBU first and then to the DCDU. The operation in the reverse sequence may cause personalinjury or component damage.

NOTE

Figure 5-79 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC. When the BBU case is installed in an extensionTMC, the cable connections are the same.




----End


Context

NOTE





837







l When inserting a board into a slot, keep the board on the same plane as the slot. Do not

bend the board or insert it at an angle. Figure 5-82 shows correct and incorrect operations.




838



stack or deform boards after they are unpacked.l When inserting a board, ensure that it does not collide with the subrack and is properly

installed.

Installing the boards into the BBUFigure 5-83 uses the WMPT and UPEU as examples to illustrate how to install boards in theBBU.


2. If there are ejector levers on the panel, raise them.3. Gently slide the board into the slot.4. If there are ejector levers on the panel, close them.5. Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).




839


Installing the boards into the SLPUFigure 5-84 uses the UELP as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the SLPU.


2. Gently slide the board into the slot.3. Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 N·m (5.31 lbf·in.).


5.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the outdoor distributionmodule 06D-2 (shortened to ODM) and outdoor fiber distribution 06 (shortened to OFD) on thetop or side of a cabinet.




840

Prerequisitesl The following tools are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a Phillips

screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needle-nosepliers.

Contextl An ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed on one side of a single cabinet, or two

ODM or OFD mounting frames can be installed on one side of stacked cabinets or bothsides of a single cabinet. The ODM or OFD mounting frame can be installed depending onsite space and the number of ODMs or OFDs to be installed.

l An ODM/OFD mounting frame or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are preferentiallyinstalled on the right side of a single cabinet or stacked cabinets. If an ODM/OFD mountingframe or two ODM/OFD mounting frames are installed on the left side of a single cabinetor stacked cabinets, only one ODM or OFD can be installed one ODM/OFD mountingframe.

Figure 5-85 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with six or less RRUs configured)




841

Figure 5-86 ODM or OFD installation scenario (with 7 to 12 RRUs configured)

Procedurel Installing a mounting frame or two mounting frames on one side of a single cabinet

or mounting frames or both sides of a single cabinet1. Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the following

figure.




842


2. Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use a

torque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.


3. Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use two

M6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 N·m(344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.




843


4. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/








844


6. Optional: If two ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frames need to be installed on bothsides of a single cabinet, the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed onthe other side of the cabinet according to Step 3, Step 4 and Step 5.

l Installing mounting frames on one side of stacked cabinets

1. Remove the four plastic screws from the top of the cabinet, as shown in the followingfigure.


2. Use four M12x30 nuts to secure a mounting kit on the top of the cabinet, and use atorque screwdriver to tighten the nuts to 45 N·m (398.25 lbf·in.), as shown in thefollowing figure.




845


3. Place the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on one side of the cabinet, and use twoM6x14 screws to tighten the mounting frame to the mounting kit on the top to 5 N·m(344.25 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.





846

4. Use two M6x14 screws to secure the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame on

the installed ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame.5. Use two M6X14 screws to tighten the attachment plate to the bottom of the ODM06D/


Figure 5-95 Tightening the second ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame and itsattachment plate (1)






847

Figure 5-96 Tightening the second attachment plate

l Installing the ODM06D or OFD06

1. Use six M4 screws to secure the mounting ears onto the ODM06D or OFD06 to 1.2N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), as shown in the following figure.




848

Figure 5-97 Installing mounting ears

2. Place the ODM06D or OFD06 on the bulges of pre-securing parts on the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame, as shown in the following figure.

NOTE

l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the right side of the cabinet, theODM06D or OFD06 can be installed on one side or in the middle of the mounting frame.

l If the ODM06D/OFD06 mounting frame is installed on the left side of the cabinet, the ODM06Dor OFD06 can be installed only in the middle of the mounting frame.

Figure 5-98 Pre-securing the ODM06D or OFD06

(1) Pre-securing part




849

3. Use four M6x14 screws to secure the ODM06D or OFD06 onto the ODM06D/OFD06

mounting frame to 3 N·m (26.55 lbf·in.). This is a recommended tightening torque.

Figure 5-99 Securing the ODM06D or OFD06

----End



Procedure





850


----End

5.9.5 Installing the SLPUDuring the upgrade, if there is no vacant slot for installing a UELP or UFLP in the BBU case,an SLPU needs to be configured.

Prerequisites

The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,and ESD gloves are available.

Context

The following figure shows the recommended position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 orAPM30H.

l When the SLPU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that SLPU be installed inthe top 1 U space in the APM30H.

l When the SLPU is installed in the APM30, it is recommended that SLPU be installed inthe 1 U space below the BBU in the APM30.

Figure 5-101 Position for installing the SLPU in an APM30 or APM30H

(1) Recommended position for installing the SLPU inan APM30

(2) Recommended position for installing the SLPU inan APM30H




851

Procedure

Step 1 Install cable claws on both sides of the SLPU case, and move the mounting ear on each side onehole backwards. Use four M4 screws to secure the mounting ears to 1.2 N·m (10.62 lbf·in.), asshown in Figure 5-102.

Figure 5-102 Installing a cable claw

Step 2 Slide the SLPU into the cabinet, and then use a screwdriver to tighten the two M6 screws on themounting ears of the SLPU to 2 N·m (17.70 lbf·in.), as shown in Figure 5-103.

Figure 5-103 Installing the SLPU




852

Step 3 Install the surge protection transfer cable, as shown in Figure 5-104.

NOTE

The following figure shows the connection of an E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable and an E1/T1 cable inGSM mode. For the transmission cable connections in other modes, see "Transmission Cable Connections" inBTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description or DBS3900 Hardware Description.

Figure 5-104 Installing a surge protection transfer cable

(1) T1: E1/T1 surge protection transfer cable (1) T2: E1/T1 cable

Step 4 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and use cable ties tobind them.


----End


5.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two CabinetsThis section describes the changes of power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables,transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between two cabinetsduring the upgrade from BTS3900A (with breathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).

Power Cables, PGND Cables, and Equipotential CablesTable 5-14 lists the changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable.




853

Table 5-14 Changes of power cables, PGND cable, and equipotential cable

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Inputpowercablefor theAPM30 (inACscenarios)




Depending ontheexternalequipment


Inputpowercablefor theTMC(in ACscenarios)

To bereused.Theconnector atoneendneedsto bereplaced.


LOAD7 porton theEPU


or0.006in.2)





854

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Inputpowercablefor theTMC(in DCscenarios)




OTterminal (M6,25mm2 or0.039in.2)




- - - - Dependingon theexternalequipment


OTterminal (M6,a groupofcableswith across-sectional areaof 35mm2

[0.054in2] ortwogroupsofcableswith across-sectional areaof 16mm2

[0.025in2])

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-13Ain theRFC




855

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd





To bereplaced


RFC1terminal ontheEPUin theAPM30

OTterminal

RTN(+)andNEG(-)terminalsneartheINPUTsilkscreen ontheDCDU-13Ain theRFC

RRUpowercable

Added

- - - - EPC5orEPC4connector


Depending ontheexternalequipment

PWRport ontheRRU

Powercablefor theheaterin theTMC

To bereused

Barewire

8-pintransferterminal ontheinnerleftwallof theAPM30

Barewire

8-pintransferterminal ontheinnerleftwallof theTMC

- - - -




856

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




Powercablesfor thebatterycabinet



or0.054in.2)

BATterminal ontheEPUin theAPM30

OTterminal (M8,35mm2 or0.054in.2)

Wiringterminal forthestoragebatteries intheBBC

Powercablefor theheating filmin thebatterycabinet


- 8-pinwiringterminal intheAPM30

- Junctionterminal fortheinputpowercableof theheating filmin theBBC

Equipotential cable

To bereused

OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal (M6)


PGNDcable

To bereused

OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal(M6)


OTterminal (M6)





857

NOTE



Table 5-15 Signal cables changes

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd




APMI-BBUmonitoringsignalcable

Tobereused

RJ45connector

COM_INport ontheAPMIin theAPM30

RJ45connector

MON1 porton theUPEUin theBBUin theAPM30

RJ45connector

COM_INport ontheCMUEA intheAPM30

RJ45connector


FMUA-BBUmonitoringsignalcable

Tobereplaced

RJ45connector

COM_INport ontheFMUA intheRFC

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

COM_INport ontheCMUEAassembly intheRFC

RJ45connector





858

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd





Tobereused

DLCconnector


DLCconnector



DLCconnector


DLCconnector



BBUalarmcable

Tobereused

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

Externalalarmdevice

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

Externalalarmdevice


Tobereused

DB15maleconnector




DB15maleconnector







859

Cable ChangeType


ConnectoratOneEnd




ConnectoratOneEnd





Tobereused

Barewire



Barewire




Table 5-16 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI electrical cables

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End




E1/T1cable

To bereused

DB26 maleconnector

OUTSIDE porton the UELP



FE/GEEthernet cable

To bereused

RJ45 connector FE electricalport near theOUTSIDEsilkscreen onthe UFLP



To bereused



l FCconnector

l SCconnector

l LCconnector





860

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End





To bereused

DB25connector

INSIDE porton the UELP

DB26connector

E1/T1 port onthe GTMU,WMPT/UMPT,or UTRP in theBBU


To bereused





To bereused




To bereused






861

Cable Change Type

Connector atOne End




CPRIelectrical cable

To bereused

SFP20 maleconnector




SFP20 maleconnector






Table 5-17 RF cables changes

Cable ChangeType

Connectorat One End





Antennafeeder







RX_INBport on theRFU





862

Installing Input Power Cables for the APM30

Input power cables for the APM30 connect the external power equipment to the input wiringterminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the APM30.










An AC-powered BTS3900A supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110V AC dual-live-wire power supplies. To support different types of power supply, the APM30needs to use different input power cables, as shown in Table 5-18.

Table 5-18 Specifications of input power cables for the APM30


Remarks

Input powercables for theAPM30supplied with220 V AC three-phase power

L1wire




l Black cablewith dualinsulationlayers andfour corewires

L2wire



L3wire



Nwire






863


Remarks

Input powercables for theAPM30supplied with220 V ACsingle-phasepower





Nwire



Input powercables for theAPM30supplied with110 V AC dual-live-wire power

L1wire





L2wire



Nwire



Procedure

Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the APM30.


2. Add OT terminals to both ends of the cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cables for the APM30, as shown in Figure 5-105, Figure 5-106, orFigure 5-107.



NOTE


3. Route the power cables into the cabinet along the left side of the cabinet interior, connecteach wire to the corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screwsto 4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).




864


Figure 5-105 Installing input power cables for the APM30 on the EPU side (220 V AC three-phase)





865

Figure 5-106 Installing input power cables for the APM30 on the EPU side (220 V AC single-phase)




866

Figure 5-107 Installing the input power cable for the APM30 on the EPU side (110 V AC dual-live-wire)




----End

Installing Power Cables from the APM30 to the TMC

Power cables from the APM30 to the TMC feed power from the APM30 to all components inthe TMC. You need to replace the connectors at both ends of the power cables from the APM30to the TMC to reuse the power cables.









867





Table 5-19 lists the specifications of the power cables from the APM30 to the TMC.

Table 5-19 Specifications of power cables from the APM30 to the TMC

Cable WireColor

One End The Other End Remarks

Input powercables forthe TMC

RTN(+)wire


They can bereused and theirconnectors needto be replacedonsite.NEG

(-)wire


Procedure

Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC.1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to each end of the input power cables for the TMC according to the

specifications in Table 5-19. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the PowerCable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cables for the TMC, as shown in Figure 5-108.1. Remove the protective cover from the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.2. Connect the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the power cables to the

DC output port LOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30.3. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC, and tighten the screws on the OT terminals to4.8 N·m (42.48 lbf·in.).





868

Figure 5-108 Installing input power cables for the TMC




----End

Installing Power Cables from the APM30 to RFCs

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from the APM30to RFCs.









869





Table 5-20 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30 to RFCs.

Table 5-20 Specifications of power cables from the APM30 to RFCs

Cable WireColor


Remarks

DCDU-13Apower cables

RTN(+)wire




NEG(-)wire

Blue

Power cablesbetweencascadedDCDU-13As

RTN(+)wire




NEG(-)wire

Blue

Procedure

Step 1 Install input power cables for the RFC (between the APM30 and the DCDU-13A on the innerleft wall of the RFC), as shown in Figure 5-109.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC1 terminals on the EPU

in the APM30.

NOTE

If two RFCs are configured, connect the input power cables for the second RFC to the RFC2 terminals onthe EPU.

2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-13A in the RFC.




870


Step 2 Install power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As (between the left and right DCDU-13As),as shown in Figure 5-110.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals on the left DCDU-13A.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals on the right DCDU-13A.




871

Figure 5-110 Installing power cables between cascaded DCDU-13As




----End

Installing Power Cables from the APM30 to the BBCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from the APM30to the BBC.








872





Table 5-21 lists the specifications of power cables from the APM30 to the BBC.

Table 5-21 Specifications of power cables from the APM30 to the BBC

Cable WireColor


Remarks

Power cablesfor thebatterycabinet

RTN(+)wire



They aredelivered andtheir connectorsneed to be addedonsite.NEG

(-)wire

Black

Procedure

Step 1 Add connectors to the power cables to be installed according to the specifications in the precedingtable.1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors at each end of the cables by performing the following operations:

l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cablel Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable

Step 2 Install power cables for the BBC, as shown in Figure 5-111.1. Connect the OT terminals (M8) at one end of the power cables to the DC output terminals

near the BAT silkscreen on the right side of the EPU in the APM30.2. Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the right side of the BBC.




873

Figure 5-111 Installing power cables for the battery cabinet




----End

(Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables

When an AC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables andmain power cables need to be installed onsite. RRU power cables feed power from the outdoordistribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the EPU in theAPM30H to the ODM.







874







RRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installationguide.




Mainpowercables

RTN(+)


OT terminal(M6)


NEG(-)

Blue

RRUpowercables

RTN(+)




NEG(-)

Blue

Procedure






875




NOTE










876






Step 6 Connect main power cables to the EPU in the APM30H.




877

1. Add OT terminals to the main power cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe OT Terminal and the Power Cable.






----End





878

Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theRFC when -48 V DC power is supplied.










Table 5-23 lists the specifications of input power cables for the RFC.

Table 5-23 Specifications of input power cables for the RFC

Cable WireColor


Remarks

Input powercables for theRFC

(16 mm2 or0.025 in.2,two groups)

RTN(+)wire




NEG(-) wire

Blue

Procedure

Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the RFC.


2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the RFC according to Table 1.For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install input power cables for the RFC, as shown in Figure 5-116.

1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)terminals on the DCDU-13A in the RFC.

2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.




879





----End

Installing Input Power Cables for the TMC

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for theTMC when -48 V DC power is supplied.









880





Table 5-24 lists the specifications of input power cables for the TMC.

Table 5-24 Specifications of input power cables for the TMC

Cable WireColor


Remarks

Input powercables for theTMC

(16 mm2 or0.025 in.2,one group)

RTN(+)wire




NEG(-) wire

Blue

Procedure

Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the TMC.1. Cut the cables to the length suitable for the actual cable route.2. Add connectors to both ends of the input power cables for the TMC according to Table

5-24. For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cables for the TMC, as shown in Figure 5-117.1. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)

terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC.2. Connect the connector at the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.




881

Figure 5-117 Installing input power cables for the TMC




----End

(Optional) Installing RRU Power CablesWhen a DC-powered BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, RRU power cables andmain power cables need to be installed onsite. RRU power cables feed power from the outdoordistribution module (ODM) to RRUs, and main power cables feed power from the external powerequipment to the ODM.




882









RRU. For details about how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the relatedRRU installation guide.




Mainpowercables

RTN(+)




NEG(-)

Blue

RRUpowercables

RTN(+)




NEG(-)

Blue

Procedure






883




NOTE










884






Step 6 Connect the connectors at one end of RRU power cables to RRUs.




885

Step 7 Connect main power cables to the external power equipment.

1. Add connectors to each end of the power cables according to the instructions in Assemblingthe Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable.

2. Connect the cord end terminals at one end of power cables to the input ports on the ODM.

3. Connect the other end of the power cables to the external power equipment.





----End





886

Installing E1/T1 CablesThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing E1/T1 cables.



– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l When a TMC uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of E1/

T1 cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30 that is shown in Figure5-122.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cables to the OUTSIDE ports on the UELP, as shown in Figure5-122.

NOTE







887

Figure 5-122 Installing E1/T1 cables

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cables out of the cable hole on the bottom left side of thecabinet.



----End

Installing FE/GE Ethernet Cables

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE Ethernet cables.







888

l FE/GE Ethernet cables are shielded straight-through cables.l When a TMC uses the -48 V DC power supply, the cable connections and routing of FE/

GE Ethernet cables in this cabinet are the same as those in an APM30 that is shown inFigure 5-124.

Procedure

Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through a cable bag into the cabinet.

Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE Ethernet cables in a proper position within 1 m (3.28 ft) fromthe cable hole of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 5-123.1. Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE Ethernet cables, and strip a length of about

40 mm (1.57 in.) jacket from the cables to expose the shield layers2. Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE Ethernet cables through the

clip.3. Attach the ground clip to the shield layers of the FE/GE Ethernet cables and tighten the M4

screws on the ground clip to 1.2 N·m (0.27 lbf·in.).


Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) portnear the OUTSIDE silkscreen on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 5-124.




889

NOTE




Figure 5-124 Installing FE/GE Ethernet cables

Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.



----End

Installing FE/GE Fiber Optic CablesThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables.




890



– Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is

labeled as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multimode optical

module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.l FE/GE fiber optic cables have an LC connector at one end and an FC, SC, or LC connector

at the other end.l SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on an LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, the two ports

cannot be used simultaneously.l SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, the two

ports cannot be used simultaneously.l This section uses the procedure for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H as

an example. The procedures for installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H and aTMC11H are the same.


Procedure

Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 5-125.1. Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the corresponding

BBU board.2. Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.3. Lower the puller of the optical module.4. Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.5. Raise the puller of the optical module.




891


Step 2 Insert the optical modules into the corresponding FE/GE optical ports, as shown in Figure5-126.

NOTE




Step 3 Stick temporary labels to the FE/GE fiber optic cables to be installed.

Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables into the optical module, as shown in Figure5-126.




892

Figure 5-126 Installing FE/GE fiber optic cables

Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cables out of the cabinet through the cable hole onthe bottom right side of the cabinet.


Step 7 Replace the temporary labels on the FE/GE fiber optic cables with engineering labels. Fordetailed operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End






893

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30.


in the APM30 or TMC. The second BBU does not perform the monitoring function. Forthe monitoring scheme in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.


Table 5-26 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30




CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andAPM30)

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin theAPM30

To be reused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30), as shown inthe following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the

APM30.




894

Figure 5-127 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andAPM30)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC.







895

Table 5-27 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in thebatterycabinet

OT terminal Temperaturesensor in theBBC

2-pinconnector

TEM_BATport on thePMU in theAPM30

To be reused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30), as shown byillustration 1 in the following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the

APM30.

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the battery cabinet (between theBBC and APM30), as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.1. Connect the 2-pin connector at one end of the power cable to the TEM_BAT port on the

PMU in the APM30.2. Connect the temperature sensor at one end of the cable to the cable bridge at the upper left

side of BBC.




896

Figure 5-128 Installing a monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the batterycabinet (between the BBC and APM30)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 TMCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 TMC.



l Monitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuringof the cabinets. The following table lists the specifications of monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets, which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.




897

Table 5-28 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30+1 TMC





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC andRFC)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the TMC

RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30), as shown byillustration 1 in the following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the

APM30.

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC and RFC), asshown by illustration 2 in the following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the TMC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the

RFC.




898

Figure 5-129 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (betweenthe TMC and RFC)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMCThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMC.







899

Table 5-29 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMC





RJ45connector


RJ45connector


To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theTMC andRFC)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on thefan assemblyin the TMC

RJ45connector


To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablefor thetemperaturesensor in thebatterycabinet

OT terminal Temperaturesensor in theBBC

2-pinconnector

TEM_BATport on thePMU in theAPM30

To be reused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30), as shown byillustration 1 in the following figure.


2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in theAPM30.

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC and RFC), asshown by illustration 2 in the following figure.

1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the TMC.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the RFC.

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the battery cabinet (between theBBC and APM30), as shown by illustration 3 in the following figure.

1. Connect the temperature sensor at one end of the cable to the cable bridge at the upper leftside of BBC.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the TEM_BAT port on the PMU in the APM30.




900

Figure 5-130 Installing monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+1 APM30+1 BBC+1 TMC


----End



Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC

This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cablebetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC.




901




Table 5-30 Specifications of a monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenarioof 1 RFC+1 TMC




CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(betweenthe RFC andTMC)

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU in theTMC

To bereused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC), as shown inFigure 5-131.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the TMC.




902

Figure 5-131 Installing a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC andTMC)


----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMCsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMCs.

ContextMonitoring signal cables inside each cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of thecabinets. Table 5-31 lists the specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets,which are installed after the restructuring of the cabinets.




903

Table 5-31 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+2 TMCs




CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(between theRFC andTMC)

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

MON0 porton the UPEUin the BBUin the TMC

To be reused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(between theRFC andextensionTMC)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on thefan assemblyin theextensionTMC

RJ45connector


To be reused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC), as shown byillustration 1 in the following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the TMC.

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the RFC and extensionTMC), as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the RFC.2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the extension

TMC.




904

Figure 5-132 Installing monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of1 RFC+2 TMCs


----End

Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMCsThis section describes the procedure and precautions for installing monitoring signal cablesbetween two cabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMCs.







905

Table 5-32 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenarioof 2 RFCs+2 TMCs




CMUEA-BBUmonitoringsignal cable(betweenthe RFC andTMC)

RJ45connector


RJ45connector

MON0 porton theUPEU in theBBU in theTMC

To bereused

Monitoringsignal cablebetweencascadedCMUEAs(betweenthe RFC andextensionTMC)

RJ45connector

COM_INport on thefanassembly intheextensionTMC

RJ45connector


To bereused


RJ45connector

COM_INport on theCMUEAassembly inthe rightRFC

RJ45connector

COM_OUTport on theCMUEAassembly inthe left RFC

To bereused

Procedure

Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC), as shown byillustration 1 in the following figure.


2. Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU in the TMC.

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the RFC and extensionTMC), as shown by illustration 2 in the following figure.

1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the rightRFC.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assemblyin the extension TMC.

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between two RFCs), as shownby illustration 3 in the following figure.




906

1. Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA assembly in the leftRFC.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA assembly in theright RFC.

Figure 5-133 Installing monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of2 RFCs+2 TMCs


----End

5.10.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal CablesThis section describes how to install inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or single-mode basestation.

Prerequisitesl The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.l The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.l The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable.





907






Context



InterconnectionMode


BBU 0 BBU 1




NOTE






908

Procedure

Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the opticalmodules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.

1. Lower the puller of the optical module.

2. Insert the optical module into the port.






NOTE



1. Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0.

2. Connect the other end of the cables to the CI ports on the UMPT_U and UMPT_L in BBU1.

Step 4 Install one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the WBBPf to the WBBPf, as shown in thefollowing figure. The inter-BBU signal cable is installed only to interconnect the WBBPf in aBBU to the WBBPf in another BBU.

1. Connect one end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 0.

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1.




909

NOTE

l When both BBUs are installed in an APM30, install inter-BBU signal cables, as shown in Figure 5-137.When BBU 0 and BBU 1 are installed in an APM30 and a TMC, respectively, install inter-BBU signalcables, as shown in Figure 5-138.








910




----End



ProcedureStep 1 Route the RF jumper into the cabinet through the cable outlet in the cabinet according to one of

the manners shown in Figure 5-139. Lay out the installed RF jumper according to the instructionsin Cabling Requirements.




911





NOTE





912





Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumpers according to the instructions in Attaching the ColorRing.


----End




913

5.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical CablesCPRI electrical cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RFUs.

Procedure

Step 1 Remove dustproof bags from the connectors at both ends of the CPRI electrical cables.


NOTE





Step 3 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cables through the cable holes on the left side of thepower cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the correspondingRFUs, as shown in Figure 5-143.

Figure 5-143 Installing CPRI electrical cables

Step 4 Connect the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables to the CPRI0 ports on thepanels of the RFUs, as shown in Figure 5-143.




914


NOTE

l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cables at the top of the DCDU-13A in the RFC or inthe base of the RFC.

l Lay out the cables according to the manners in Figure 5-143. Ensure that the cables are routed to the RFUsthrough the cable bridge above the RFUs.


----End

5.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic CablesCPRI fiber optic cables transmit CPRI signals between the BBU and RRUs.

Contextl This section uses a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) as an example. The CPRI fiber optic cables are

connected to the same positions and routed in the same way in a BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).l The single-mode optical module is labeled as SM and the multimode optical module is

labeled as MM.l The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical

module is black or gray.l The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.




Station Cables.l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing

CPRI Cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 5-144.1. Lower the puller of the optical module.2. Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP. Then insert

an optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on theRF module.




915

NOTE




Step 2 Install CPRI fiber optic cables, as shown in Figure 5-145 and Figure 5-146.1. Stick temporary labels to the CPRI fiber optic cables to be installed.2. Remove the dustproof caps from the connectors on the fiber optic cables.3. Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into

the optical modules in the GTMU, WBBP, or LBBP, and then insert the DLC connectorslabeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module in the RF module.

NOTICEl When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the breakout fiber optic







916

Figure 5-146 Installing CPRI fiber optic cables

Step 3 Route CPRI fiber optic cables out of the cabinet from the cable hole on the left bottom. Fordetails about how to route the cables, see Cabling Requirements.

Step 4 Replace the temporary labels on the CPRI fiber optic cables with engineering labels. For detailedoperations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End






917


No. Item





5 The paint on the surface is intact. The damaged paint is repaired. For details, see3.14.3 Repainting.


Installation Environment Checklist

Table 5-35 describes the installation environment checklist.


No. Item



3 Antirust powder on the cabinet door is cleared.

Electrical Connection Checklist

Table 5-36 describes the electrical connection checklist.


No. Item

1 All self-made PGND cables are copper-based and have proper core diameters. Thereshould not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed.






918

No. Item



6 The flat washer and the spring washer are well mounted on all OT terminals, andthe OT terminals are intact and contact with the wiring terminals properly.

7 The exterior of the storage battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.

8 The shell of the storage battery is clean without any leakage trace.

9 The wiring post on the storage battery stands properly without any damage, and thepost is not covered with any acid substances.



12 The voltage of the storage battery is normal.l The voltage of a 2 V storage battery cell ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.l The voltage of a 12 V storage battery cell ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.l The total voltage of the storage batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.

13 The circuit breakers for the storage batteries are set to OFF.

Cable Installation Checklist

Table 5-37 describes the cable installation checklist.


No. Item



3 Different types of cables are bound separately when being routed, for example, thepower cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber optic cables, and E1/T1/FE cables.


5 All the labels at both ends of the cables are legible.




919

No. Item

6 The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are smoothwithout sharp edges. An extra length of 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.2 in.) of theoutdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.

7 Any unused port is properly protected.



Checklist for the Hardware Upgrade

Table 5-38 describes the checklist for the hardware upgrade.


No.

Cabinet Item

1 APM30 or TMC The vacant customer space in the cabinet has been configured withthe filler module.

2 APM30 or TMC The ELU has been installed. For detailed operations, see 5.4.5Replacing the AFMU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs arecorrect and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may causeproblems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

3 APM30 or TMC The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

4 APM30 or TMC The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.




920

No.

Cabinet Item

5 APM30 or TMC The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 5.4.9 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

6 APM30 or TMC The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,see 5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 5.9.1 Installing aBBU Case.

7 APM30 or TMC The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has beeninstalled. For detailed operations, see 5.4.9 Installing Cables inthe Cabinet.

8 APM30 The input power cable for the APM30 has been replaced. Fordetailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cables for theAPM30.

9 APM30 The power transfer cable for the APM30 has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

10 APM30 The PGND cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 5.4.6 Replacing the Power System.

11 APM30 The monitoring signal transfer cable and CMUEA-BBUmonitoring signal cable have been installed. For detailedoperations, see 5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

12 TMC The CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable has been installed.For detailed operations, see 5.5.8 Installing Cables in theCabinet.

13 RFC The ELU assembly has been installed. For detailed operations, see4.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel. Ensurethat all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. Anincorrect or faulty ELU may cause problems in heat dissipationor monitoring.

14 RFC The monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor,monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, ELU signalcable, and monitoring signal cable for the fan have been installed.For detailed operations, see 4.6.6 Installing Cables in theCabinet.

15 RFC The input power cable for the RFC has been replaced. For detailedoperations, see Installing Power Cables from the APM30 toRFCs or Installing Input Power Cables for the RFC.

16 - The shield layer of the RRU power cable has been grounded. Fordetailed operations, see (Optional) Installing RRU PowerCables or (Optional) Installing RRU Power Cables.




921

No.

Cabinet Item

17 BBC The power cable for the storage batteries has been installed. Fordetailed operations, see 5.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries andCables in the Battery Cabinet.





l All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.

l All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been set to OFF.

l All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T havebeen set to OFF.

l Switch on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T has been set to OFF.

l Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.

l Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.

Context



BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.

l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU formaintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.




922


BaseStation


BTS3900A(Ver.B)







BTS3900A(Ver.C)










923

BaseStation


BTS3900A(Ver.D)





NOTE






924






925






Cabinet Component





Fanassembly





IBBS200DorIBBS200T













926


Cabinet Component


















NOTE






927






units.







replace the board.




928


















929


Cabinet Component
























units.




930








replace the board.








----End




931




Procedure







----End

5.13.2 Sealing Cable HolesAfter all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable holes on the base.




932

Procedure

Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet, asshown in the following figure.

Figure 5-150 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, or IBBS200T cabinet

(1) Fireproof mud

Step 2 Seal the RF cable holes in the RFC, as shown in the following figure.

1. Route the cables through the corresponding cable holes, and install the cable outlet moduleon the bottom of the cabinet.

2. Use rubber caps to seal the unused cable holes in the cable outlet module.

3. Tighten the screw on the cable outlet module.







(6) Screw - -




933

Step 3 Push the baffle plates on both sides of the base forwards until the baffle plates contact with thecables, and then tighten the screws on the baffle plates, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-152 Closing baffle plates of the cable holes on both sides of the base

Step 4 Push the baffle plate on the rear of the base forwards until the baffle plate contact with the cables,and then tighten the screw on the baffle plate, as shown in the following figure.


Step 5 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable holes on the base, as shown in the following figure.




934

Figure 5-154 Sealing cable holes on the base

(1) Fireproof mud

Step 6 Tighten the two screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate, as shownin the following figure.


----End


Prerequisites

Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to Table 5-45.




935





Procedure








936






NOTE


----End




937